Quectel M66

GSM/GPRS
Quectel M66
The World’s Smallest
LCC Quad-band
GSM/GPRS Module
GPRS Multi-slot
Class 12
Extended Temperature
Range -40°C to +85°C
Highly Compact Size
LCC Type
Embedded Internet
Services Protocols
Quectel Enhanced
AT Commands
Digital Audio
Bluetooth 3.0*
Quad-band
Key Benefits
The globe’s tiniest Quad-band LCC GSM/GPRS module
Easier soldering process with LCC package
M66 is currently the smallest Quad-band GSM/GPRS module
using LCC castellation packaging on the market. Based on the
latest 2G chipset, it has the optimal performance in SMS &
Data transmission and audio service even in harsh environment. Its ultra-compact 15.8 × 17.7 × 2.3mm profile makes
M66 a perfect platform for size sensitive applications.
M66 adopts surface mounted technology, making it the ideal
solution for durable and rugged designs. And its low profile
and small size of LCC package ensure M66 easily embedded
into the low-volume applications and provide the reliable connectivity with the applications. This kind of package is ideally
suited for large-scale manufacturing which has the strict requirements for cost and efficiency.
Power consumption as low as 1.3mA
Support Voice, Bluetooth*, QuecFOTATM and Quectel
OpenCPU function
Embedded powerful Internet service protocols, multiple
Sockets & IP addresses
Its compact form factor, low power consumption and extended
temperature make M66 the best choice for applications such
as wearable devices, automotive, industrial PDA, personal
tracking, wireless POS, smart metering, telematics and other
M2M applications.
Quectel M66
17.7 mm
The World’s Smallest
LCC Quad-band
GSM/GPRS Module
2.3 mm
15.8 mm
General Features
Specifications for Voice
Quad-band
850/900/1800/1900MHz
GPRS Multi-slot Class
Class 12
GPRS Mobile Station
Class B
Compliant to GSM Phase
2/2+
Class 4
(2W @850/900MHz)
Class 1
(1W @1800/1900MHz)
Supply Voltage Range
3.3~4.6V
Low Power
Consumption
1.3mA @DRX=5
1.2mA @DRX=9
Operation Temperature
-40 °C ~ +85 °C
Dimensions
17.7 × 15.8 × 2.3mm
Weight
Approx. 1.3g
Half Rate (HR)
Full Rate (FR)
Enhanced Full Rate (EFR)
Adaptive Multi-Rate (AMR)
Echo Arithmetic
Echo Cancellation
Echo Suppression
Noise Reduction
4.0V nominal
Interfaces
GSM 07.07, 07.05 and other enhanced
Control via AT Commands AT Commands
Specifications for Data
GPRS Class 12
Speech Codec Modes
85.6kbps (Downlink)
85.6kbps (Uplink)
SIM/USIM
3V/1.8V
UART
×3
Analog Audio Channel
2 output channels and 1 input channel
Bluetooth
BT 3.0*
Profile: SPP*, OPP*
ADC
×1
PCM
×1
RTC
×1
Antenna PAD
×2
(One for GSM antenna, the other for
Bluetooth antenna)
PBCCH support
Coding Schemes
CS 1, 2, 3, 4
USSD
* Under development
Non Transparent Mode
Protocols
TCP/UDP/PPP/FTP/HTTP/SMTP/CMUX/
SSL
Specifications for SMS
Point-to-point MO and MT
SMS Cell Broadcast
Text and PDU Mode
Copyright
© 2014 Quectel Wireless Solutions Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved
http://www.quectel.com
HQ address: Office 501, Building 13, No.99
Tianzhou Road, Shanghai, China 200233
Tel: +86 21 51086236
Fax: +86 21 54453668
Email: [email protected]
M66 Hardware Design
GSM/GPRS Module Series
Rev. M66_Hardware_Design_V1.0
Date: 2014-08-07
www.quectel.com
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
Our aim is to provide customers with timely and comprehensive service. For any
assistance, please contact our company headquarters:
Quectel Wireless Solutions Co., Ltd.
Office 501, Building 13, No.99, Tianzhou Road, Shanghai, China, 200233
Tel: +86 21 5108 6236
Mail: [email protected]
Or our local office, for more information, please visit:
http://www.quectel.com/support/salesupport.aspx
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
For technical support, to report documentation errors, please visit:
http://www.quectel.com/support/techsupport.aspx
GENERAL NOTES
QUECTEL OFFERS THIS INFORMATION AS A SERVICE TO ITS CUSTOMERS. THE INFORMATION
PROVIDED IS BASED UPON CUSTOMERS’ REQUIREMENTS. QUECTEL MAKES EVERY EFFORT
TO ENSURE THE QUALITY OF THE INFORMATION IT MAKES AVAILABLE. QUECTEL DOES NOT
MAKE ANY WARRANTY AS TO THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN, AND DOES NOT ACCEPT
ANY LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY, LOSS OR DAMAGE OF ANY KIND INCURRED BY USE OF OR
RELIANCE UPON THE INFORMATION. ALL INFORMATION SUPPLIED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO
CHANGE WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE.
COPYRIGHT
THIS INFORMATION CONTAINED HERE IS PROPRIETARY TECHNICAL INFORMATION OF
QUECTEL CO., LTD. TRANSMITTABLE, REPRODUCTION, DISSEMINATION AND EDITING OF THIS
DOCUMENT AS WELL AS UTILIZATION OF THIS CONTENTS ARE FORBIDDEN WITHOUT
PERMISSION. OFFENDERS WILL BE HELD LIABLE FOR PAYMENT OF DAMAGES. ALL RIGHTS ARE
RESERVED IN THE EVENT OF A PATENT GRANT OR REGISTRATION OF A UTILITY MODEL OR
DESIGN.
Copyright © Quectel Wireless Solutions Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved.
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
1 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
About the Document
History
Revision
1.0
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Date
Author
Description
2014-08-07
Felix YIN
Initial
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
2 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
Contents
About the Document ................................................................................................................................... 2
Contents ....................................................................................................................................................... 3
Table Index ................................................................................................................................................... 6
Figure Index ................................................................................................................................................. 7
1
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 9
1.1.
Safety Information.................................................................................................................... 10
2
Product Concept ................................................................................................................................ 11
2.1.
General Description ................................................................................................................. 11
2.2.
Key Features ........................................................................................................................... 11
2.3.
Functional Diagram ................................................................................................................. 14
2.4.
Evaluation Board ..................................................................................................................... 14
3
Application Interface ......................................................................................................................... 15
3.1.
Pin of Module ........................................................................................................................... 16
3.1.1. Pin Assignment .............................................................................................................. 16
3.1.2. Pin Description ............................................................................................................... 17
3.2.
Operating Modes ..................................................................................................................... 21
3.3.
Power Supply........................................................................................................................... 22
3.3.1. Power Features of Module ............................................................................................. 22
3.3.2. Decrease Supply Voltage Drop ...................................................................................... 22
3.3.3. Reference Design For Power Supply ............................................................................ 23
3.3.4. Monitor Power Supply .................................................................................................... 24
3.4.
Power On and Down Scenarios .............................................................................................. 24
3.4.1. Power On ....................................................................................................................... 24
3.4.2. Power Down ................................................................................................................... 26
3.4.2.1.
Power Down Module Using the PWRKEY Pin .................................................. 26
3.4.2.2.
Power Down Module Using AT Command ........................................................ 27
3.4.2.3.
Over-voltage or Under-voltage Automatic Shutdown ........................................ 28
3.4.3. Restart ............................................................................................................................ 28
3.5.
Power Saving........................................................................................................................... 29
3.5.1. Minimum Functionality Mode ......................................................................................... 29
3.5.2. SLEEP Mode .................................................................................................................. 30
3.5.3. Wake Up Module From SLEEP Mode ........................................................................... 30
3.5.4. Summary of State Transition .......................................................................................... 30
3.6.
RTC Backup............................................................................................................................. 31
3.7.
Serial Interfaces ....................................................................................................................... 32
3.7.1. UART Port ...................................................................................................................... 34
3.7.1.1.
The Feature of UART Port................................................................................. 34
3.7.1.2.
The Connection of UART .................................................................................. 35
3.7.1.3.
Firmware Upgrade ............................................................................................. 36
3.7.2. Debug Port ..................................................................................................................... 37
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
3 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
3.7.3. Auxiliary UART Port ....................................................................................................... 38
3.7.4. UART Application ........................................................................................................... 38
3.8.
Audio Interfaces ....................................................................................................................... 39
3.8.1. Decrease TDD Noise and other Noise .......................................................................... 40
3.8.2. Microphone Interfaces Design ....................................................................................... 41
3.8.3. Receiver and Speaker Interface Design ........................................................................ 41
3.8.4. Earphone Interface Design ............................................................................................ 43
3.8.5. Audio Characteristics ..................................................................................................... 43
3.9.
PCM Interface .......................................................................................................................... 44
3.9.1. Configuration .................................................................................................................. 44
3.9.2. Timing ............................................................................................................................. 45
3.9.3. Reference Design .......................................................................................................... 46
3.9.4. AT Command ................................................................................................................. 47
3.10. SIM Card Interface................................................................................................................... 48
3.10.1. SIM Card Application...................................................................................................... 48
3.10.2. 6-Pin SIM Cassette ........................................................................................................ 50
3.11. ADC ......................................................................................................................................... 51
3.12. Behaviors of The RI ................................................................................................................. 51
3.13. Network Status Indication ........................................................................................................ 53
3.14. RF Transmitting Signal Indication............................................................................................ 54
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
4
Antenna Interface ............................................................................................................................... 55
4.1.
GSM Antenna Interface ........................................................................................................... 55
4.1.1. Reference Design .......................................................................................................... 55
4.1.2. RF Output Power ........................................................................................................... 57
4.1.3. RF Receiving Sensitivity ................................................................................................ 57
4.1.4. Operating Frequencies................................................................................................... 58
4.1.5. RF Cable Soldering ........................................................................................................ 58
4.2.
Bluetooth Antenna Interface .................................................................................................... 58
5
Electrical, Reliability and Radio Characteristics ............................................................................ 60
5.1.
Absolute Maximum Ratings ..................................................................................................... 60
5.2.
Operating Temperature ............................................................................................................ 60
5.3.
Power Supply Ratings ............................................................................................................. 61
5.4.
Current Consumption .............................................................................................................. 62
5.5.
Electro-static Discharge........................................................................................................... 64
6
Mechanical Dimensions .................................................................................................................... 65
6.1.
Mechanical Dimensions of Module.......................................................................................... 65
6.2.
Recommended Footprint ......................................................................................................... 67
6.3.
Top View of the Module ........................................................................................................... 68
6.4.
Bottom View of the Module...................................................................................................... 68
7
Storage and Manufacturing .............................................................................................................. 69
7.1.
Storage..................................................................................................................................... 69
7.2.
Soldering .................................................................................................................................. 70
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
4 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
7.3.
Packaging ................................................................................................................................ 70
7.3.1. Tape and Reel Packaging .............................................................................................. 71
8 Appendix A Reference....................................................................................................................... 72
9 Appendix B GPRS Coding Scheme ................................................................................................. 77
10 Appendix C GPRS Multi-slot Class .................................................................................................. 79
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
5 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
Table Index
TABLE 1: MODULE KEY FEATURES ............................................................................................................... 12
TABLE 2: CODING SCHEMES AND MAXIMUM NET DATA RATES OVER AIR INTERFACE ........................ 13
TABLE 3: IO PARAMETERS DEFINITION ........................................................................................................ 17
TABLE 4: PIN DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................... 17
TABLE 5: OVERVIEW OF OPERATING MODES ............................................................................................. 21
TABLE 6: SUMMARY OF STATE TRANSITION ............................................................................................... 30
TABLE 7: LOGIC LEVELS OF THE UART INTERFACE .................................................................................. 33
TABLE 8: PIN DEFINITION OF THE UART INTERFACES .............................................................................. 33
TABLE 9: PIN DEFINITION OF AUDIO INTERFACE ....................................................................................... 39
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
TABLE 10: TYPICAL ELECTRET MICROPHONE CHARACTERISTICS ......................................................... 43
TABLE 11: TYPICAL SPEAKER CHARACTERISTICS ..................................................................................... 43
TABLE 12: PIN DEFINITION OF PCM INTERFACE ......................................................................................... 44
TABLE 13: CONFIGURATION........................................................................................................................... 44
TABLE 14: QPCMON COMMAND DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................... 47
TABLE 15: QPCMVOL COMMAND DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................... 48
TABLE 16: PIN DEFINITION OF THE SIM INTERFACE .................................................................................. 48
TABLE 17: PIN DESCRIPTION OF AMPHENOL SIM CARD HOLDER ........................................................... 50
TABLE 18: PIN DEFINITION OF THE ADC ...................................................................................................... 51
TABLE 19: CHARACTERISTICS OF THE ADC ................................................................................................ 51
TABLE 20: BEHAVIORS OF THE RI ................................................................................................................. 51
TABLE 21: WORKING STATE OF THE NETLIGHT .......................................................................................... 53
TABLE 22: PIN DEFINITION OF THE RFTXMON ............................................................................................ 54
TABLE 23: PIN DEFINITION OF THE RF_ANT ................................................................................................ 55
TABLE 24: ANTENNA CABLE REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................. 56
TABLE 25: ANTENNA REQUIREMENTS.......................................................................................................... 56
TABLE 26: THE MODULE CONDUCTED RF OUTPUT POWER .................................................................... 57
TABLE 27: THE MODULE CONDUCTED RF RECEIVING SENSITIVITY ....................................................... 57
TABLE 28: THE MODULE OPERATING FREQUENCIES ................................................................................ 58
TABLE 29: PIN DEFINITION OF THE BT_ANT ................................................................................................ 59
TABLE 30: ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS .................................................................................................. 60
TABLE 31: OPERATING TEMPERATURE........................................................................................................ 60
TABLE 32: THE MODULE POWER SUPPLY RATINGS .................................................................................. 61
TABLE 33: THE MODULE CURRENT CONSUMPTION .................................................................................. 62
TABLE 34: THE ESD ENDURANCE (TEMPERATURE: 25ºC, HUMIDITY: 45%) ............................................ 64
TABLE 35: RELATED DOCUMENTS ................................................................................................................ 72
TABLE 36: TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS ...................................................................................................... 73
TABLE 37: DESCRIPTION OF DIFFERENT CODING SCHEMES .................................................................. 77
TABLE 38: GPRS MULTI-SLOT CLASSES ...................................................................................................... 79
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
6 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
Figure Index
FIGURE 1: MODULE FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM ............................................................................................... 14
FIGURE 2: PIN ASSIGNMENT ......................................................................................................................... 16
FIGURE 3: VOLTAGE RIPPLE DURING TRANSMITTING .............................................................................. 22
FIGURE 4: REFERENCE CIRCUIT FOR THE VBAT INPUT ........................................................................... 23
FIGURE 5: REFERENCE CIRCUIT FOR POWER SUPPLY ............................................................................ 24
FIGURE 6: TURN ON THE MODULE WITH AN OPEN-COLLECTOR DRIVER .............................................. 24
FIGURE 7: TURN ON THE MODULE WITH A BUTTON .................................................................................. 25
FIGURE 8: TURN-ON TIMING .......................................................................................................................... 26
FIGURE 9: TURN-OFF TIMING ........................................................................................................................ 27
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
FIGURE 10: TIMING OF RESTARTING SYSTEM ............................................................................................ 29
FIGURE 11: RTC SUPPLY FROM A NON-CHARGEABLE BATTERY ............................................................. 31
FIGURE 12: RTC SUPPLY FROM A RECHARGEABLE BATTERY ................................................................. 31
FIGURE 13: RTC SUPPLY FROM A CAPACITOR ........................................................................................... 31
FIGURE 14: CHARGING CHARACTERISTICS OF SEIKO’S XH414H-IV01E ................................................ 32
FIGURE 15: REFERENCE DESIGN FOR FULL-FUNCTION UART ................................................................ 35
FIGURE 16: REFERENCE DESIGN FOR UART PORT ................................................................................... 36
FIGURE 17: REFERENCE DESIGN FOR UART PORT WITH HARDWARE FLOW CONTROL .................... 36
FIGURE 18: REFERENCE DESIGN FOR FIRMWARE UPGRADE ................................................................. 37
FIGURE 19: REFERENCE DESIGN FOR DEBUG PORT ............................................................................... 37
FIGURE 20: REFERENCE DESIGN FOR AUXILIARY UART PORT ............................................................... 38
FIGURE 21: LEVEL MATCH DESIGN FOR 3.3V SYSTEM.............................................................................. 38
FIGURE 22: LEVEL MATCH DESIGN FOR RS-232 ......................................................................................... 39
FIGURE 23: REFERENCE DESIGN FOR AIN ................................................................................................. 41
FIGURE 24: REFERENCE DESIGN FOR AOUT1 ........................................................................................... 41
FIGURE 25: HANDSET INTERFACE DESIGN FOR AOUT2 ........................................................................... 42
FIGURE 26: SPEAKER INTERFACE DESIGN WITH AN AMPLIFIER FOR AOUT2 ....................................... 42
FIGURE 27: EARPHONE INTERFACE DESIGN .............................................................................................. 43
FIGURE 28: LONG SYNCHRONIZATION & SIGN EXTENSION DIAGRAM ................................................... 45
FIGURE 29: LONG SYNCHRONIZATION & ZERO PADDING DIAGRAM....................................................... 46
FIGURE 30: SHORT SYNCHRONIZATION & SIGN EXTENSION DIAGRAM ................................................. 46
FIGURE 31: SHORT SYNCHRONIZATION & ZERO PADDING DIAGRAM .................................................... 46
FIGURE 32: REFERENCE DESIGN FOR PCM ............................................................................................... 47
FIGURE 33: REFERENCE CIRCUIT FOR SIM INTERFACE WITH THE 6-PIN SIM CARD HOLDER ........... 49
FIGURE 34: AMPHENOL C707 10M006 512 2 SIM CARD HOLDER.............................................................. 50
FIGURE 35: RI BEHAVIOR OF VOICE CALLING AS A RECEIVER ................................................................ 52
FIGURE 36: RI BEHAVIOR AS A CALLER ....................................................................................................... 52
FIGURE 37: RI BEHAVIOR OF URC OR SMS RECEIVED ............................................................................. 52
FIGURE 38: REFERENCE DESIGN FOR NETLIGHT ..................................................................................... 53
FIGURE 39: RFTXMON SIGNAL DURING TRANSMITTING BURST ............................................................. 54
FIGURE 40: REFERENCE DESIGN FOR GSM ANTENNA ............................................................................. 56
FIGURE 41: RF SOLDERING SAMPLE ........................................................................................................... 58
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
7 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
FIGURE 42: REFERENCE DESIGN FOR BLUETOOTH ANTENNA ............................................................... 59
FIGURE 43: M66 MODULE TOP AND SIDE DIMENSIONS (UNIT: MM) ......................................................... 65
FIGURE 44: M66 MODULE BOTTOM DIMENSIONS (UNIT: MM) ................................................................... 66
FIGURE 45: RECOMMENDED FOOTPRINT (UNIT: MM) ................................................................................ 67
FIGURE 46: TOP VIEW OF THE MODULE ...................................................................................................... 68
FIGURE 47: BOTTOM VIEW OF THE MODULE .............................................................................................. 68
FIGURE 48: RAMP-SOAK-SPIKE REFLOW PROFILE.................................................................................... 70
FIGURE 49: TAPE AND REEL SPECIFICATION .............................................................................................. 71
FIGURE 50: DIMENSIONS OF REEL ............................................................................................................... 71
FIGURE 51: RADIO BLOCK STRUCTURE OF CS-1, CS-2 AND CS-3 ........................................................... 77
FIGURE 52: RADIO BLOCK STRUCTURE OF CS-4 ....................................................................................... 78
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
8 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
1
Introduction
This document defines the M66 module and describes its hardware interface which are connected with
the customer application and the air interface.
This document can help you quickly understand module interface specifications, electrical and
mechanical details. Associated with application note and user guide, you can use M66 module to design
and set up mobile applications easily.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
9 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
1.1. Safety Information
The following safety precautions must be observed during all phases of the operation, such as usage,
service or repair of any cellular terminal or mobile incorporating M66 module. Manufacturers of the
cellular terminal should send the following safety information to users and operating personnel and to
incorporate these guidelines into all manuals supplied with the product. If not so, Quectel does not take on
any liability for customer failure to comply with these precautions.
Full attention must be given to driving at all times in order to reduce the risk of an
accident. Using a mobile while driving (even with a handsfree kit) cause distraction
and can lead to an accident. You must comply with laws and regulations restricting
the use of wireless devices while driving.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Switch off the cellular terminal or mobile before boarding an aircraft. Make sure it
switched off. The operation of wireless appliances in an aircraft is forbidden to
prevent interference with communication systems. Consult the airline staff about
the use of wireless devices on boarding the aircraft, if your device offers a Airplane
Mode which must be enabled prior to boarding an aircraft.
Switch off your wireless device when in hospitals or clinics or other health care
facilities. These requests are desinged to prevent possible interference with
sentitive medical equipment.
GSM cellular terminals or mobiles operate over radio frequency signal and cellular
network and cannot be guaranteed to connect in all conditions, for example no
mobile fee or an invalid SIM card. While you are in this condition and need
emergent help, please remember using emergency call. In order to make or
receive call, the cellular terminal or mobile must be switched on and in a service
area with adequate cellular signal strength.
Your cellular terminal or mobile contains a transmitter and receiver. When it is ON ,
it receives and transmits radio frequency energy. RF interference can occur if it is
used close to TV set, radio, computer or other electric equipment.
In locations with potencially explosive atmospheres, obey all posted signs to turn
off wireless devices such as your phone or other cellular terminals. Areas with
potencially exposive atmospheres including fuelling areas, below decks on boats,
fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, areas where the air contains
chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders.
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
10 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
2
Product Concept
2.1. General Description
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
M66 is a Quad-band GSM/GPRS engine that works at frequencies of GSM850MHz, GSM900MHz,
DCS1800MHz and PCS1900MHz. The M66 features GPRS multi-slot class 12 and supports the GPRS
coding schemes CS-1, CS-2, CS-3 and CS-4. For more details about GPRS multi-slot classes and coding
schemes, please refer to the Appendix B & C.
With a tiny profile of 15.8mm × 17.7mm × 2.3mm, the module can meet almost all the requirements for
M2M applications, including Vehicles and Personal Tracking, Security System, Wireless POS, Industrial
PDA, Smart Metering, and Remote Maintenance& Control, etc.
M66 is an SMD type module with LCC package, which can be easily embedded into applications. It
provides abundant hardware interfaces like PCM Interface.
Designed with power saving technique, the current consumption of M66 is as low as 1.3 mA in SLEEP
mode when DRX is 5.
M66 is integrated with Internet service protocols, such as TCP/UDP, FTP and PPP. Extended AT
commands have been developed for you to use these Internet service protocols easily.
M66 supports Bluetooth interface, It is fully compliant with Bluetooth specification 3.0.
The module fully complies with the RoHS directive of the European Union.
2.2. Key Features
The following table describes the detailed features of M66 module.
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
11 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
Table 1: Module Key Features
Feature
Implementation
Power Supply
Single supply voltage: 3.3V ~ 4.6V
Typical supply voltage: 4V
Power Saving
Typical power consumption in SLEEP mode: 1.3 mA @DRX=5
1.2 mA @DRX=9
Frequency Bands




GSM Class
Quad-band: GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800, PCS1900.
The module can search these frequency bands automatically
The frequency bands can be set by AT command
Compliant to GSM Phase 2/2+
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Small MS
Transmitting Power


Class 4 (2W) at GSM850 and GSM900
Class 1 (1W) at DCS1800 and PCS1900
GPRS Connectivity



GPRS multi-slot class 12 (default)
GPRS multi-slot class 1~12 (configurable)
GPRS mobile station class B







GPRS data downlink transfer: max. 85.6kbps
GPRS data uplink transfer: max. 85.6kbps
Coding scheme: CS-1, CS-2, CS-3 and CS-4
Support the protocols PAP (Password Authentication Protocol)
usually used for PPP connections
Internet service protocols TCP/UDP, FTP, PPP, HTTP, NTP, PING
Support Packet Broadcast Control Channel (PBCCH)
Support Unstructured Supplementary Service Data (USSD)
Temperature Range



Normal operation: -35°C ~ +80°C
Restricted operation: -40°C ~ -35°C and +80°C ~ +85°C 1)
Storage temperature: -45°C ~ +90°C
Bluetooth


Support Bluetooth specification 3.0
Output Power: Class 1 (1W)


Text and PDU mode
SMS storage: SIM card
DATA GPRS
SMS
SIM Interface
Support SIM card: 1.8V, 3.0V
Audio Features
Speech codec modes:
 Half Rate (ETS 06.20)
 Full Rate (ETS 06.10)
 Enhanced Full Rate (ETS 06.50/06.60/06.80)
 Adaptive Multi-Rate (AMR)
 Echo Suppression
 Noise Reduction
UART Interfaces
UART Port:
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
12 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
 Seven lines on UART port interface
 Used for AT command, GPRS data
 Multiplexing function
 Support autobauding from 4800bps to 115200bps
Debug Port:
 Two lines on debug port interface DBG_TXD and DBG_RXD
 Debug Port only used for firmware debugging
Auxiliary Port:
 Used for AT command
Phonebook Management
Support phonebook types: SM, ME, ON, MC, RC, DC, LD, LA
SIM Application Toolkit
Support SAT class 3, GSM 11.14 Release 99
Real Time Clock
Supported
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Physical Characteristics
Size: 15.8±0.15 × 17.7±0.15 × 2.3±0.2mm
Weight: Approx. 1.3g
Firmware Upgrade
Firmware upgrade via UART Port
Antenna Interface
Connected to antenna pad with 50 Ohm impedance control
NOTE
1)
When the module works within this temperature range, the deviations from the GSM specification may
occur. For example, the frequency error or the phase error will be increased.
Table 2: Coding Schemes and Maximum Net Data Rates over Air Interface
Coding Scheme
1 Timeslot
2 Timeslot
4 Timeslot
CS-1
9.05kbps
18.1kbps
36.2kbps
13.4kbps
26.8kbps
53.6kbps
15.6kbps
31.2kbps
62.4kbps
21.4kbps
42.8kbps
85.6kbps
CS-2
CS-3
CS-4
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
13 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
2.3. Functional Diagram
The following figure shows a block diagram of M66 and illustrates the major functional parts.



Radio frequency part
Power management
The peripheral interface
—Power supply
—Turn-on/off interface
—UART interface
—Audio interface
—PCM interface
—SIM interface
—ADC interface
—RF interface
—BT interface
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
RF_ANT
ESD
RF PAM
VBAT
PMU
RF Transceiver
26MHz
PWRKEY
BT
VDD_EXT
VRTC
SIM
Interface
NETLIGHT
BT_ANT
VDD_EXT
RTC
Serial
Interface
BB&RF
AUDIO
SIM
Interface
GPIO
UART
MEMORY
AUDIO
PCM
PCM
ADC
ADC
Figure 1: Module Functional Diagram
2.4. Evaluation Board
In order to help you to develop applications with M66, Quectel supplies an evaluation board (EVB),
RS-232 to USB cable, power adapter, earphone, antenna and other peripherals to control or test the
module. For details, please refer to the document [12].
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
14 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
3
Application Interface
The module adopts LCC package and has 44 pins. The following chapters provide detailed descriptions
about these pins.









Power supply
Power on/down
Power Saving
RTC
Serial interfaces
Audio interfaces
PCM interface
SIM Card interface
ADC
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
15 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
3.1. Pin of Module
VRTC
VBAT
VBAT
GND
GND
DBG_TXD
DBG_RXD
GND
GND
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
3.1.1. Pin Assignment
AGND
1
35 RF_ANT
SPK2P
2
34 GND
MICP
3
33 PCM_OUT
MICN
4
32 PCM_IN
SPK1P
5
SPK1N
6
PWRKEY
7
AVDD
8
28 RXD_AUX
ADC0
9
27 GND
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
M66
Top View
31 PCM_SYNC
30 PCM_CLK
29 TXD_AUX
SIM_GND 10
26 BT_ANT
SIM_DATA 11
25 RFTXMON
SIM_RST 12
24 VDD_EXT
13
POWER GND
AUDIO
UART
SIM
PCM
CTS 22
DCD 21
RI 20
DTR 19
RXD 18
TXD 17
NETLIGHT 16
RESERVED 15
23 RTS
SIM_VDD 14
SIM_CLK
ANT RESERVED OTHERS
Figure 2: Pin Assignment
NOTE
Keep all reserved pins open.
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
16 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
3.1.2. Pin Description
Table 3: IO Parameters Definition
Type
Description
IO
Bidirectional input/output
DI
Digital input
DO
Digital output
PI
Power input
PO
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Power output
AI
Analog input
AO
Analog output
Table 4: Pin Description
Power Supply
PIN
Name
VBAT
VRTC
VDD_
EXT
PIN No.
42,43
44
24
I/O
PI
IO
PO
M66_Hardware_Design
Description
DC Characteristics
Comment
Main power supply of module:
VBAT=3.3V~4.6V
VImax=4.6V
VImin=3.3V
VInorm=4.0V
Make sure that
supply sufficient
current in a
transmitting burst
typically rises to
1.6A.
Power supply for RTC when
VBAT is not supplied for the
system.
Charging for backup battery
or golden capacitor when the
VBAT is applied.
VImax=3.3V
VImin=1.5V
VInorm=2.8V
VOmax=3V
VOmin=2V
VOnorm=2.8V
Iout(max)=2mA
Iin≈10uA
If unused, keep this
pin open.
Supply 2.8V voltage for
external circuit.
VOmax=2.9V
VOmin=2.7V
VOnorm=2.8V
IOmax=20mA
1. If unused, keep
this pin open.
2. Recommend to
add a 2.2~4.7uF
bypass capacitor,
Confidential / Released
17 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
when using this pin
for power supply.
GND
27,34
36,37
40,41
Ground
Turn On/off
PIN
Name
PWR
KEY
PIN
No.
7
Audio Interface
PIN
Name
PIN
No.
MICP
MICN
3,
4
SPK1P
SPK1N
5,
6
SPK2P
2
AGND
1
I/O
Description
DC Characteristics
DI
Power on/off key. PWRKEY
should be pulled down for a
moment to turn on or turn off
the system.
VILmax=
0.1×VBAT
VIHmin=
0.6×VBAT
VIHmax=3.1V
Comment
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
I/O
Description
DC Characteristics
AI
Positive and negative voice
input
If unused, keep
these pins open.
AO
Channel 1 positive and
negative voice output
AO
Channel 2 voice output
If unused, keep
these pins open.
Support both voice
and ringtone
output.
Refer to Section 3.8
Analog ground. Separate
ground connection for external
audio circuits.
Comment
If unused, keep this
pin open.
Network Status Indicator
PIN
Name
NETLIG
HT
PIN
No.
16
I/O
Description
DC Characteristics
Comment
DO
Network status indication
VOHmin=
0.85×VDD_EXT
VOLmax=
0.15×VDD_EXT
If unused, keep this
pin open.
UART Port
PIN
Name
PIN
No.
I/O
Description
DC Characteristics
Comment
TXD
17
DO
Transmit data
RXD
18
DI
Receive data
VILmin=0V
VILmax=
0.25×VDD_EXT
If only use TXD,
RXD and GND to
communicate,
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
18 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
recommended
connecting RTS to
GND via 0R resistor
and keeping other
pins open.
Request to send
VIHmin=
0.75×VDD_EXT
VIHmax=
VDD_EXT+0.3
VOHmin=
0.85×VDD_EXT
VOLmax=
0.15×VDD_EXT
I/O
Description
DC Characteristics
Comment
DO
Transmit data
Same as above
If unused, keep
these pins open.
DC Characteristics
Comment
Same as above
If unused, keep
these pins open.
Description
DC Characteristics
Comment
Power supply for SIM card
The voltage can be
selected by software
automatically. Either
1.8V or 3.0V.
DTR
19
DI
Data terminal ready
RI
20
DI
Ring indication
DCD
21
DO
Data carrier detection
CTS
22
DO
Clear to send
RTS
23
DI
Debug Port
PIN
Name
PIN
No.
DBG_
TXD
39
DBG_
RXD
38
Auxiliary Port
PIN
Name
PIN
No.
TXD_
AUX
29
RXD_
AUX
28
SIM Interface
PIN
Name
SIM_
VDD
PIN
No.
14
SIM_
CLK
13
SIM_
DATA
11
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
DI
Receive data
I/O
Description
DO
Transmit data
DI
I/O
PO
Receive data
DO
SIM clock
IO
SIM data
M66_Hardware_Design
VOLmax=
0.15×SIM_VDD
VOHmin=
0.85×SIM_VDD
VILmax=
0.25×SIM_VDD
VIHmin=
0.75×SIM_VDD
VOLmax=
0.15×SIM_VDD
VOHmin=
0.85×SIM_VDD
Confidential / Released
All signals of SIM
interface should be
protected against
ESD with a TVS
diode array.
Maximum trace
length is 200mm
from the module
pad to SIM card
holder.
19 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
SIM_
RST
12
SIM_
GND
10
DO
VOLmax=
0.15×SIM_VDD
VOHmin=
0.85×SIM_VDD
SIM reset
SIM ground
ADC
PIN
Name
PIN
No.
AVDD
8
ADC0
9
PCM
PIN
Name
PIN
No.
PCM_
CLK
30
PCM_
SYNC
31
PCM_
IN
32
PCM_
OUT
33
I/O
Description
DC Characteristics
Comment
PO
Reference voltage of
ADC circuit
VOmax=2.9V
VOmin=2.7V
VOnorm=2.8V
If unused, keep this
pin open.
AI
General purpose analog
to digital converter.
Voltage range:
0V to 2.8V
If unused, keep this
pin open.
I/O
Description
DC Characteristics
Comment
DO
PCM clock
DO
PCM frame
synchronization
DI
PCM data input
DO
PCM data output
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
VILmin= 0V
VILmax=
0.25×VDD_EXT
VIHmin=
0.75×VDD_EXT
VIHmax=
VDD_EXT+0.3
VOHmin=
0.85×VDD_EXT
VOLmax=
0.15×VDD_EXT
Antenna Interface
PIN
Name
PIN
No.
RF_
ANT
35
BT_
ANT
26
I/O
Description
DC Characteristics
IO
GSM antenna pad
Impedance of 50Ω
IO
BT antenna pad
Impedance of 50Ω
Comment
Transmitting Signal Indication
PIN
Name
PIN
No.
I/O
Description
DC Characteristics
RFTX
MON
25
DO
Transmission signal
indication
VOHmin=
0.85×VDD_EXT
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
20 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
VOLmax=
0.15×VDD_EXT
Other Interface
PIN
Name
PIN
No.
RESER
VED
15
I/O
Description
DC Characteristics
Comment
Keep these pins
open.
3.2. Operating Modes
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
The table below briefly summarizes the various operating modes in the following chapters.
Table 5: Overview of Operating Modes
Mode
Normal Operation
Function
GSM/GPRS
Sleep
After enabling sleep mode by AT+QSCLK=1, the module will
automatically enter into Sleep Mode if DTR is set to high level
and there is no interrupt (such as GPIO interrupt or data on
UART port). In this case, the current consumption of module
will reduce to the minimal level.
During Sleep Mode, the module can still receive paging
message and SMS from the system normally.
GSM IDLE
Software is active. The module has registered to the GSM
network, and the module is ready to send and receive GSM
data.
GSM TALK
GSM connection is ongoing. In this mode, the power
consumption is decided by the configuration of Power Control
Level (PCL), dynamic DTX control and the working RF band.
GPRS IDLE
The module is not registered to GPRS network. The module is
not reachable through GPRS channel.
GPRS
STANDBY
The module is registered to GPRS network, but no GPRS PDP
context is active. The SGSN knows the Routing Area where the
module is located at.
GPRS READY
The PDP context is active, but no data transfer is ongoing. The
module is ready to receive or send GPRS data. The SGSN
knows the cell where the module is located at.
GPRS DATA
There is GPRS data in transfer. In this mode, power
consumption is decided by the PCL, working RF band and
GPRS multi-slot configuration.
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
21 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
POWER DOWN
Normal shutdown by sending the AT+QPOWD=1 command or using the
PWRKEY pin. The power management ASIC disconnects the power supply from
the base band part of the module, and only the power supply for the RTC is
remained. Software is not active. The UART interfaces are not accessible.
Operating voltage (connected to VBAT) remains applied.
Minimum
Functionality Mode
(without removing
power supply)
AT+CFUN command can set the module to a minimum functionality mode
without removing the power supply. In this case, the RF part of the module will not
work or the SIM card will not be accessible, or both RF part and SIM card will be
disabled, but the UART port is still accessible. The power consumption in this
case is very low.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
3.3. Power Supply
3.3.1. Power Features of Module
The power supply is one of the key issues in designing GSM terminals. Because of the 577us radio burst
in GSM every 4.615ms, power supply must be able to deliver high current peaks in a burst period. During
these peaks, drops on the supply voltage must not exceed minimum working voltage of module.
For the M66 module, the max current consumption could reach to 1.6A during a burst transmission. It will
cause a large voltage drop on the VBAT. In order to ensure stable operation of the module, it is
recommended that the max voltage drop during the burst transmission does not exceed 400mV.
4.615ms
577us
Burst:1.6A
IBAT
VBAT
Vdrop
Figure 3: Voltage Ripple during Transmitting
3.3.2. Decrease Supply Voltage Drop
The power supply range of the module is 3.3V to 4.6V. Make sure that the input voltage will never drop
below 3.3V even in a burst transmission. If the power voltage drops below 3.3V, the module could turn off
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
22 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
automatically. For better power performance, it is recommended to place a 100uF tantalum capacitor with
low ESR (ESR=0.7Ω) and ceramic capacitor 100nF, 33pF and 10pF near the VBAT pin. The reference
circuit is illustrated in Figure 4.
The VBAT route should be wide enough to ensure that there is not too much voltage drop during burst
transmission. The width of trace should be no less than 2mm and the principle of the VBAT route is the
longer route, the wider trace.
VBAT
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
+
C1
C2
100uF
100nF
C3
C4
10pF
33pF
0603
0603
GND
Figure 4: Reference Circuit for the VBAT Input
3.3.3. Reference Design For Power Supply
The power design for the module is very important, since the performance of power supply for the module
largely depends on the power source. The power supply is capable of providing the sufficient current up to
2A at least. If the voltage drop between the input and output is not too high, it is suggested to use a LDO
as module’s power supply. If there is a big voltage difference between the input source and the desired
output (VBAT), a switcher power converter is recommended to be used as a power supply.
Figure 5 shows a reference design for +5V input power source. The designed output for the power supply
is 4.16V and the maximum load current is 3A. In addition, in order to get a stable output voltage, a zener
diode is placed close to the pins of VBAT. As to the zener diode, it is suggested to use a zener diode
whose reverse zener voltage is 5.1V and dissipation power is more than 1 Watt.
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
23 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
MIC29302WU
U1
DC_IN
VBAT
5
ADJ
3
GND
C2
OUT 4
EN
C1
1
2 IN
R1
120K
R2
51K
470uF 100nF
R3
C3
C4
470R 470uF 100nF
D1
5.1V
Figure 5: Reference Circuit for Power Supply
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
3.3.4. Monitor Power Supply
To monitor the supply voltage, customer can use the AT+CBC command which includes three
parameters: charging status, remaining battery capacity and voltage value (in mV). It returns the 0-100
percent of battery capacity and actual value measured between VBAT and GND. The voltage is
automatically measured in period of 5s. The displayed voltage (in mV) is averaged over the last
measuring period before the AT+CBC command is executed.
For details, please refer to the document [1].
3.4. Power On and Down Scenarios
3.4.1. Power On
The module can be turned on by driving the pin PWRKEY to a low level voltage. An open collector driver
circuit is suggested to control the PWRKEY. A simple reference circuit is illustrated as below.
PWRKEY
4.7K
Turn on pulse
47K
Figure 6: Turn on the Module with an Open-collector Driver
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
24 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
NOTE
M66 module is set to autobauding mode (AT+IPR=0) by default. In the autobauding mode, URC RDY is
not reported to the host controller after module is powered on. When the module is powered on after a
delay of 2 or 3 seconds, it can receive AT command. Host controller should first send an AT or at string in
order that the module can detect baud rate of host controller, and it should send the second or the third AT
or at string until receiving OK string from the module. Then enter AT+IPR=x;&W to set a fixed baud rate
for the module and save the configuration to flash memory of the module. After these configurations, the
URC RDY would be received from the UART port of the module every time when the module is powered
on. For more details, refer to the section AT+IPR in document [1].
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
The other way to control the PWRKEY is through a button directly. A TVS component is indispensable to
be placed nearby the button for ESD protection. For the best performance, the TVS component must be
placed nearby the button. When pressing the key, electrostatic strike may generate from finger. A
reference circuit is shown in the following figure.
S1
PWRKEY
TVS
Close to
S1
Figure 7: Turn on the Module with a Button
The turn-on timing is illustrated as the following figure.
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
25 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
T1
VBAT
>1s
VIH > 0.6*VBAT
PWRKEY
(INPUT)
VIL<0.1*VBAT
54ms
VDD_EXT
(OUTPUT)
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
MODULE
STATUS
OFF
BOOTING
RUNNING
Figure 8: Turn-on Timing
NOTE
Make sure that VBAT is stable before pulling down PWRKEY pin. The time of T1 is recommended to be
100ms.
3.4.2. Power Down
The following procedures can be used to turn off the module:



Normal power down procedure: Turn off module using the PWRKEY pin
Normal power down procedure: Turn off module using command AT+QPOWD
Over-voltage or under-voltage automatic shutdown: Take effect when over-voltage or under-voltage
is detected
3.4.2.1. Power Down Module Using the PWRKEY Pin
It is a safe way to turn off the module by driving the PWRKEY to a low level voltage for a certain time. The
power down scenario is illustrated in Figure 9.
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
26 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
VBAT
PWRKEY
(INPUT)
0.7s<Pulldown<1s
Logout net about 12s
VDD_EXT
(OUTPUT)
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Figure 9: Turn-off Timing
The power down procedure causes the module to log off from the network and allows the firmware to
save important data before completely disconnecting the power supply.
Before the completion of the power down procedure, the module sends out the result code shown below:
NORMAL POWER DOWN
NOTE
This result code does not appear when autobauding is active and DTE and DCE are not correctly
synchronized after start-up. The module is recommended to set a fixed baud rate.
After that moment, no further AT commands can be executed. Then the module enters the power down
mode, the RTC is still active.
3.4.2.2. Power Down Module Using AT Command
It is also a safe way to turn off the module via AT command AT+QPOWD=1. This command will let the
module log off from the network and allow the firmware to save important data before completely
disconnecting the power supply.
Before the completion of the power down procedure the module sends out the result code shown below:
NORMAL POWER DOWN
After that moment, no further AT commands can be executed. And then the module enters the power
down mode, only the RTC is still active.
Please refer to the document [1] for details about the AT command AT+QPOWD.
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
27 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
3.4.2.3. Over-voltage or Under-voltage Automatic Shutdown
The module will constantly monitor the voltage applied on the VBAT, if the voltage is ≤3.5V, the following
URC will be presented:
UNDER_VOLTAGE WARNING
If the voltage is ≥4.5V, the following URC will be presented:
OVER_VOLTAGE WARNING
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
The normal input voltage range is from 3.3V to 4.6V. If the voltage is >4.6V or <3.3V, the module would
automatically shut down itself.
If the voltage is <3.3V, the following URC will be presented:
UNDER_VOLTAGE POWER DOWN
If the voltage is >4.6V, the following URC will be presented:
OVER_VOLTAGE POWER DOWN
NOTE
These Unsolicited result codes do not appear when autobauding is active and DTE and DCE are not
correctly synchronized after start-up. The module is recommended to set to a fixed baud rate.
After that moment, no further AT commands can be executed. The module logs off from network and
enters power down mode, and RTC is still active.
3.4.3. Restart
You can restart the module by driving the PWRKEY to a low level voltage for a certain time, which is
similar to the way of turning on module. Before restarting the module, at least 500ms should be delayed
after detecting the low level of VDD_EXT. The restart timing is illustrated as the following figure.
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
28 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
PWRKEY
(INPUT)
Turn off
Delay >0.5s
Restart
Pull down the PWRKEY
to turn on the module
VDD_EXT
(OUTPUT)
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Figure 10: Timing of Restarting System
3.5. Power Saving
Based on system requirements, there are several actions to drive the module to enter low current
consumption status. For example, AT+CFUN can be used to set module into minimum functionality mode
and DTR hardware interface signal can be used to lead system to SLEEP mode.
3.5.1. Minimum Functionality Mode
Minimum functionality mode reduces the functionality of the module to a minimum level. The consumption
of the current can be minimized when the slow clocking mode is activated at the same time. The mode is
set with the AT+CFUN command which provides the choice of the functionality levels <fun>=0, 1, 4.



0: minimum functionality
1: full functionality (default)
4: disable both transmitting and receiving of RF part
If the module is set to minimum functionality by AT+CFUN=0, the RF function and SIM card function
would be disabled. In this case, the UART port is still accessible, but all AT commands related with RF
function or SIM card function will be not available.
If the module has been set by the command with AT+CFUN=4, the RF function will be disabled, but the
UART port is still active. In this case, all AT commands related with RF function will be not available.
After the module is set by AT+CFUN=0 or AT+CFUN=4, it can return to full functionality by AT+CFUN=1.
For detailed information about AT+CFUN, please refer to the document [1].
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
29 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
3.5.2. SLEEP Mode
The SLEEP mode is disabled by default. You can enable it by AT+QSCLK=1. On the other hand, the
default setting is AT+QSCLK=0 and in this mode, the module cannot enter SLEEP mode.
When the module is set by the command with AT+QSCLK=1, you can control the module to enter or exit
from the SLEEP mode through pin DTR. When DTR is set to high level, and there is no on-air or hardware
interrupt such as GPIO interrupt or data on UART port, the module will enter SLEEP mode automatically.
In this mode, the module can still receive voice, SMS or GPRS paging from network, but the UART port
does not work.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
3.5.3. Wake Up Module From SLEEP Mode
When the module is in the SLEEP mode, the following methods can wake up the module.



If the DTR Pin is set low, it would wake up the module from the SLEEP mode. The UART port will be
active within 20ms after DTR is changed to low level.
Receive a voice or data call from network wakes up module.
Receive an SMS from network wakes up module.
NOTE
DTR pin should be held at low level during communication between the module and DTE.
3.5.4. Summary of State Transition
Table 6: Summary of State Transition
Next Mode
Current Mode
Power Down
Power Down
Normal Mode
SLEEP Mode
Normal Mode
Sleep Mode
Use PWRKEY
Use AT command
AT+QSCLK=1 and pull up
DTR
AT+QPOWD, use PWRKEY
pin
Use PWRKEY pin
M66_Hardware_Design
Pull DTR down or
incoming call or SMS
or GPRS
Confidential / Released
30 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
3.6. RTC Backup
The RTC (Real Time Clock) function is supported by M66 module. The RTC is designed to work with an
internal power supply. If VBAT voltage is not present, a backup power supply such as a coin-cell battery
(rechargeable or non-chargeable) or a super-cap can be used. The VRTC pin is voltage input for RTC
and a 1.5K resistor is integrated in the module for peak current limit.
The following figures show various sample circuits for RTC backup.
Module
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
VRTC
1.5K
RTC
Core
Non-chargeable
Backup Battery
Figure 11: RTC Supply from a Non-chargeable Battery
Module
VRTC 1.5K
RTC
Core
Rechargeable
Backup Battery
Figure 12: RTC Supply from a Rechargeable Battery
Module
VRTC
1.5K
RTC
Core
Large Capacitance
Capacitor
Figure 13: RTC Supply from a Capacitor
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
31 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
The following figure shows the charging characteristics of a coin-type rechargeable battery
XH414H-IV01E from Seiko.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Figure 14: Charging Characteristics of Seiko’s XH414H-IV01E
3.7. Serial Interfaces
The module provides three serial ports: UART Port, Debug Port and Auxiliary UART Port. The module is
designed as a DCE (Data Communication Equipment), following the traditional DCE-DTE (Data Terminal
Equipment) connection. Autobauding function supports baud rate from 4800bps to 115200bps.
The UART Port:







TXD: Send data to RXD of DTE.
RXD: Receive data from TXD of DTE.
RTS: Request to send.
CTS: Clear to send.
DTR: DTE is ready and inform DCE (this pin can wake the module up).
RI: Ring indicator (when the call, SMS, data of the module are coming, the module will output signal
to inform DTE).
DCD: Data carrier detection (the validity of this pin demonstrates the communication link is set up).
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
32 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
NOTE
The module disables hardware flow control by default. When hardware flow control is required, RTS and
CTS should be connected to the host. AT command AT+IFC=2,2 is used to enable hardware flow control.
AT command AT+IFC=0,0 is used to disable the hardware flow control. For more details, please refer to
the document [1].
The Debug Port:


DBG_TXD: Send data to the COM port of computer.
DBG_RXD: Receive data from the COM port of computer.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
The Auxiliary UART Port:


TXD_AUX: Send data to the RXD of DTE.
RXD_AUX: Receive data from the TXD of DTE.
The logic levels are described in the following table.
Table 7: Logic Levels of the UART Interface
Parameter
VIL
VIH
VOL
VOH
Min.
Max.
Unit
0
0.25×VDD_EXT
V
0.75×VDD_EXT
VDD_EXT +0.3
V
0
0.15×VDD_EXT
V
0.85×VDD_EXT
VDD_EXT
V
Pin No.
Pin Name
Description
17
TXD
Transmit data
18
RXD
Receive data
19
DTR
Data terminal ready
20
RI
Ring indication
Table 8: Pin Definition of the UART Interfaces
Interface
UART Port
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
33 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
21
DCD
Data carrier detection
22
CTS
Clear to send
23
RTS
Request to send
38
DBG_RXD
Receive data
39
DBG_TXD
Transmit data
28
RXD_AUX
Receive data
29
TXD_AUX
Transmit data
Debug Port
Auxiliary UART Port
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
3.7.1. UART Port
3.7.1.1. The Feature of UART Port






Seven lines on UART interface
Contain data lines TXD and RXD, hardware flow control lines RTS and CTS, other control lines DTR,
DCD and RI.
Used for AT command, GPRS data, etc. Multiplexing function is supported on the UART Port. So far
only the basic mode of multiplexing is available.
Support the communication baud rates as the following:
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 38400, 57600, 115200.
The default setting is autobauding mode. Support the following baud rates for Autobauding function:
4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200.
The module disables hardware flow control by default. AT command AT+IFC=2,2 is used to enable
hardware flow control.
After setting a fixed baud rate or autobauding, please send “AT” string at that rate. The UART port is
ready when it responds “OK”.
Autobauding allows the module to detect the baud rate by receiving the string “AT” or “at” from the host or
PC automatically, which gives module flexibility without considering which baud rate is used by the host
controller. Autobauding is enabled by default. To take advantage of the autobauding mode, special
attention should be paid according to the following requirements:
Synchronization between DTE and DCE:
When DCE (the module) powers on with the autobauding enabled, it is recommended to wait 2 to 3
seconds before sending the first AT character. After receiving the “OK” response, DTE and DCE are
correctly synchronized.
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
34 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
If the host controller needs URC in the mode of autobauding, it must be synchronized firstly. Otherwise
the URC will be discarded.
Restrictions on autobauding operation:







The UART port has to be operated at 8 data bits, no parity and 1 stop bit (factory setting).
The “At” and “aT” commands cannot be used.
Only the strings “AT” or “at” can be detected (neither “At” nor “aT”).
The Unsolicited Result Codes like RDY, +CFUN: 1 and +CPIN: READY will not be indicated when
the module is turned on with autobauding enabled and not be synchronized.
Any other Unsolicited Result Codes will be sent at the previous baud rate before the module detects
the new baud rate by receiving the first “AT” or “at” string. The DTE may receive unknown characters
after switching to new baud rate.
It is not recommended to switch to autobauding from a fixed baud rate.
If autobauding is active it is not recommended to switch to multiplex mode.
NOTE
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
To assure reliable communication and avoid any problems caused by undetermined baud rate between
DCE and DTE, it is strongly recommended to configure a fixed baud rate and save it instead of using
autobauding after start-up. For more details, please refer to the Section AT+IPR in document [1].
3.7.1.2. The Connection of UART
The connection between module and host using UART Port is very flexible. Three connection styles are
illustrated as below.
Reference design for Full-Function UART connection is shown as below when it is applied in
modulation-demodulation.
Module (DCE)
UART port
PC (DTE)
Serial port
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DTR
DCD
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DTR
DCD
RI
RING
GND
GND
Figure 15: Reference Design for Full-Function UART
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
35 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
Three-line connection is shown as below.
Host (DTE)
Controller
Module (DCE)
UART port
TXD
TXD
RXD
RXD
GND
RTS
0R
GND
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Figure 16: Reference Design for UART Port
UART Port with hardware flow control is shown as below. This connection will enhance the reliability of
the mass data communication.
Module (DCE)
Host (DTE)
Controller
TXD
TXD
RXD
RXD
RTS
RTS
CTS
CTS
GND
GND
Figure 17: Reference Design for UART Port with Hardware Flow Control
3.7.1.3. Firmware Upgrade
The TXD, RXD can be used to upgrade firmware. The PWRKEY pin must be pulled down before firmware
upgrade. The reference circuit is shown as below:
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
36 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
Module (DCE)
IO Connector
UART port
TXD
TXD
RXD
RXD
GND
PWRKEY
GND
PWRKEY
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Figure 18: Reference Design for Firmware Upgrade
NOTE
The firmware of module might need to be upgraded due to certain reasons. It is recommended to reserve
these pins in the host board for firmware upgrade. For detailed design, please refer to the document [11].
3.7.2. Debug Port



Two lines: DBG_TXD and DBG_RXD.
It outputs log information automatically.
Debug Port is only used for firmware debugging and its baud rate must be configured as 460800bps.
Module
Peripheral
DBG_TXD
TXD
DBG_RXD
RXD
GND
GND
Figure 19: Reference Design for Debug Port
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
37 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
3.7.3. Auxiliary UART Port





Two data lines: TXD_AUX and RXD_AUX.
Auxiliary UART port is used for AT command only and does not support GPRS data, Multiplexing
function etc.
Auxiliary UART port supports the communication baud rates as the following:
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 38400, 57600, 115200.
Auxiliary UART port could be used when you send AT+QEAUART=1 string on the UART port.
The default baud rate setting is 115200bps, and does not support autobauding. The baud rate can be
modified by AT+QSEDCB command. For more details, please refer to the document [1].
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Module
Peripheral
TXD_AUX
TXD
RXD_AUX
RXD
GND
GND
Figure 20: Reference Design for Auxiliary UART Port
3.7.4. UART Application
The reference design of 3.3V level match is shown as below. If the host is a 3V system, please change
the 5.6K resistor to 10K.
Module
Peripheral
/TXD
/RXD
/RTS
/CTS
GPIO
EINT
GPIO
1K
RXD
1K
TXD
1K
RTS
1K
CTS
1K
DTR
1K
RI
1K
DCD
GND
GND
5.6K
5.6K
5.6K
Voltage level:3.3V
Figure 21: Level Match Design for 3.3V System
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
38 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
The following circuit shows a reference design for the communication between module and PC. Since the
electrical level of module is 2.8V, so a RS-232 level shifter must be used.
SP3238
28 C1+
Module
V+ 27
25 C1-
GND 2
1
C2+
VCC 26
C2-
V- 4
3
24
T1IN
T2OUT 6
TXD
23 T2IN
T1OUT 5
CTS
22 T3IN
T5OUT 12
RI
19 T4IN
T3OUT 7
17 T5IN
T4OUT 10
DCD
GND
GND
3V
GND
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
6
16 /R1OUT
7
RXD
21 R1OUT
R1IN 8
8
DTR
20 R2OUT
R2IN 9
9
RTS
18 R3OUT
R3IN 11
13 ONLINE
/STATUS 15
GND
3V
1
2
3
4
5
GND
/SHUTDOWN 14
To PC Serial Poart
Figure 22: Level Match Design for RS-232
3.8. Audio Interfaces
The module provides one analogy input channels and two analogy output channels.
Table 9: Pin Definition of Audio Interface
Interface
AIN/AOUT1
Name
Pin NO.
Description
MICP
3
Microphone positive input
MICN
4
Microphone negative input
SPK1P
5
Channel 1 Audio positive output
SPK1N
6
Channel 1 Audio negative output
MICP
3
Microphone positive input
MICN
4
Microphone negative input
SPK2P
2
Channel 2 Audio positive output
AGND
1
Form a pseudo-differential pair with SPK2P
AIN/AOUT2
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
39 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
AIN can be used for input of microphone and line. An electret microphone is usually used. AIN are
differential input channels.
AOUT1 is used for output of the receiver. This channel is typically used for a receiver built into a handset.
AOUT1 channel is a differential channel.
AOUT2 is typically used with earphone. It is a single-ended and mono channel. SPK2P and AGND can
establish a pseudo differential mode.
All of these three audio channels support voice and ringtone output, and so on, and can be switched by
AT+QAUDCH command. For more details, please refer to the document [1].
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Use AT command AT+QAUDCH to select audio channel:


0--AIN/AOUT1, the default value is 0.
1--AIN/AOUT2, this channel is always used for earphone.
For each channel, you can use AT+QMIC to adjust the input gain level of microphone. You can also use
AT+CLVL to adjust the output gain level of receiver and speaker. AT+QSIDET is used to set the
side-tone gain level. For more details, please refer to the document [1].
3.8.1. Decrease TDD Noise and other Noise
The 33pF capacitor is applied for filtering out 900MHz RF interference when the module is transmitting at
GSM900MHz. Without placing this capacitor, TDD noise could be heard. Moreover, the 10pF capacitor
here is for filtering out 1800MHz RF interference. However, the resonant frequency point of a capacitor
largely depends on the material and production technique. Therefore, customer would have to discuss
with its capacitor vendor to choose the most suitable capacitor for filtering out GSM850MHz,
GSM900MHz, DCS1800MHz and PCS1900MHz separately.
The severity degree of the RF interference in the voice channel during GSM transmitting period largely
depends on the application design. In some cases, GSM900 TDD noise is more severe; while in other
cases, DCS1800 TDD noise is more obvious. Therefore, you can have a choice based on test results.
Sometimes, even no RF filtering capacitor is required.
The capacitor which is used for filtering out RF noise should be close to audio interface or other audio
interfaces. Audio alignment should be as short as possible.
In order to decrease radio or other signal interference, the position of RF antenna should be kept away
from audio interface and audio alignment. Power alignment and audio alignment should not be parallel,
and power alignment should be far away from audio alignment.
The differential audio traces have to be placed according to the differential signal layout rule.
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
40 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
3.8.2. Microphone Interfaces Design
AIN channel come with internal bias supply for external electret microphone. A reference circuit is shown
in the following figure.
Close to Microphone
Close to Module
GND
10pF
0603
33pF
0603
GND
Differential
layout
MICP
Module
GND
10pF
0603
GND
33pF
0603
ESD
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
10pF
0603
MICN
10pF
0603
33pF
0603
33pF
0603
GND
10pF
0603
33pF
0603
10pF
0603
33pF
0603
GND
Electret
Microphone
ESD
GND
GND
Figure 23: Reference Design for AIN
3.8.3. Receiver and Speaker Interface Design
Close to speaker
GND
Differential layout
10pF
0603
33pF
0603
10pF
0603
33pF
0603
10pF
0603
33pF
0603
ESD
Module
SPK1P
SPK1N
ESD
GND
Figure 24: Reference Design for AOUT1
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
41 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
Close to Speaker
GND
Differential layout
SPK2P
Module
33pF
0603
10pF
0603
ESD
22uF
AGND
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Figure 25: Handset Interface Design for AOUT2
Close to Speaker
GND
Differential layout
Amplifier
circuit
10pF
0603
33pF
0603
10pF
0603
33pF
0603
ESD
C1
SPK2P
Module
AGND
C2
ESD
GND
Figure 26: Speaker Interface Design with an Amplifier for AOUT2
Texas Instrument’s TPA6205A1 is recommended for a suitable differential audio amplifier. There are
plenty of excellent audio amplifiers in the market.
1.NOTE
The value of C1 and C2 here depends on the input impedance of audio amplifier.
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
42 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
3.8.4. Earphone Interface Design
Close to Module
GND
Module
Close to Socket
MICN
10pF
0603
33pF
0603
MICP
10pF
0603
33pF
0603
10pF
0603
33pF
0603
Differential
layout
GND
4.7uF
10pF
0603
33pF
0603
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
GND
SPK2P
3
AGND
4
2
1
33pF
0603
10pF
0603
22uF
AGND
AGND
GND
Figure 27: Earphone Interface Design
3.8.5. Audio Characteristics
Table 10: Typical Electret Microphone Characteristics
Parameter
Working Voltage
Working Current
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
1.2
1.5
2.0
V
500
uA
200
External Microphone Load Resistance
2.2
k Ohm
Table 11: Typical Speaker Characteristics
Parameter
Min.
Load resistance
Typ.
Max.
32
Unit
Ohm
Single-ended
Ref level
AOUT1
Output
0
Load resistance
2.4
32
Vpp
Ohm
Differential
Ref level
M66_Hardware_Design
0
Confidential / Released
4.8
Vpp
43 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
AOUT2
Output
Load resistance
32
Load Resistance
Single-ended
Reference level
0
2.4
Vpp
3.9. PCM Interface
M66 supports PCM interface. It is used for digital audio transmission between the module and the device.
This interface is composed of PCM_CLK, PCM_SYNC, PCM_IN and PCM_OUT signal lines.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Pulse-code modulation (PCM) is a converter that changes the consecutive analog audio signal to discrete
digital signal. The whole procedure of Pulse-code modulation contains sampling, quantizing and
encoding.
Table 12: Pin Definition of PCM Interface
Pin NO.
30
31
32
33
Pin Name
Description
PCM_CLK
PCM clock output
PCM_SYNC
PCM frame synchronization output
PCM_IN
PCM data input
PCM_OUT
PCM data output
3.9.1. Configuration
M66 module supports 13-bit line code PCM format. The sample rate is 8 KHz, and the clock source is 256
KHz, and the module can only act as master mode. The PCM interface supports both long and short
synchronization simultaneously. Furthermore, it only supports MSB first. For detailed information, please
refer to the table below.
Table 13: Configuration
PCM
Line Interface Format
Linear
Data Length
Linear: 13 bits
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
44 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
Sample Rate
8KHz
PCM Clock/Synchronization Source
PCM master mode: clock and synchronization is
generated by module
PCM Synchronization Rate
8KHz
PCM Clock Rate
PCM master mode: 256 KHz (line)
PCM Synchronization Format
Long/short synchronization
PCM Data Ordering
MSB first
Zero Padding
Yes
Sign Extension
3.9.2. Timing
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Yes
The sample rate of the PCM interface is 8 KHz and the clock source is 256 KHz, so every frame contains
32 bits data, since M66 supports 16 bits line code PCM format, the left 16 bits are invalid. The following
diagram shows the timing of different combinations. The synchronization length in long synchronization
format can be programmed by firmware from one bit to eight bits. In the Sign extension mode, the high
three bits of 16 bits are sign extension, and in the Zero padding mode, the low three bits of 16 bits are
zero padding.
Under zero padding mode, you can configure the PCM input and output volume by executing
AT+QPCMVOL command. For more details, please refer to Chapter 3.9.4.
PCM_CLK
PCM_SYNC
MSB
PCM_OUT
Sign
extension
12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MSB
PCM_IN
Sign
extension
Figure 28: Long Synchronization & Sign Extension Diagram
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
45 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
PCM_CLK
PCM_SYNC
MSB
PCM_OUT
12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Zero padding
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Zero padding
MSB
PCM_IN
12 11 10 9
Figure 29: Long Synchronization & Zero Padding Diagram
PCM_CLK
PCM_SYNC
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
MSB
PCM_OUT
Sign extension
12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MSB
PCM_IN
Sign extension
Figure 30: Short Synchronization & Sign Extension Diagram
PCM_CLK
PCM_SYNC
MSB
PCM_OUT
12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 Zero padding
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 Zero padding
MSB
PCM_IN
12 11 10
Figure 31: Short Synchronization & Zero Padding Diagram
3.9.3. Reference Design
M66 can only work as a master, providing synchronization and clock source. The reference design is
shown as below.
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
46 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
Peripheral
(Slave)
Module
(Master)
PCM_CLK
PCM_CLK
PCM_SYNC
PCM_SYNC
PCM_OUT
PCM_IN
PCM_OUT
PCM_IN
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Figure 32: Reference Design for PCM
3.9.4. AT Command
There are two AT commands about the configuration of PCM, listed as below.
AT+QPCMON can configure operating mode of PCM.
AT+QPCMON=mode, Sync_Type, Sync_Length, SignExtension, MSBFirst.
Table 14: QPCMON Command Description
Parameter
Mode
Sync_Type
Sync_Length
SignExtension
MSBFirst
Scope
Description
0~2
0: Close PCM
1: Open PCM
2: Open PCM when audio talk is set up
0~1
0: Short synchronization
1: Long synchronization
1~8
Programmed from one bit to eight bit
0~1
0: Zero padding
1: Sign extension
0~1
0: MSB first
1: Not support
AT+QPCMVOL can configure the volume of input and output.
AT+QPCMVOL=vol_pcm_in, vol_pcm_out
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
47 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
Table 15: QPCMVOL Command Description
Parameter
Scope
Description
vol_pcm_in
0~32767
Set the input volume
vol_pcm_out
0~32767
Set the output volume
The voice may be distorted when this value exceeds 16384.
3.10. SIM Card Interface
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
3.10.1. SIM Card Application
The SIM interface supports the functionality of the GSM Phase 1 specification and also supports the
functionality of the new GSM Phase 2+ specification for FAST 64 kbps SIM card, which is intended for
use with a SIM application Tool-kit.
The SIM interface is powered by an internal regulator in the module. Both 1.8V and 3.0V SIM Cards are
supported.
Table 16: Pin Definition of the SIM Interface
Pin NO.
14
13
11
12
10
Name
Description
SIM_VDD
Supply power for SIM card. Automatic detection of SIM card voltage.
3.0V±5% and 1.8V±5%. Maximum supply current is around 10mA.
SIM_CLK
SIM card clock.
SIM_DATA
SIM card data I/O.
SIM_RST
SIM card reset.
SIM_GND
SIM card ground.
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
48 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
The reference circuit for a 6-pin SIM card socket is illustrated as the following figure.
SIM_GND
Module
100nF
SIM_VDD
SIM_RST
SIM_CLK
SIM_DATA
SIM_Holder
VCC
RST
CLK
22R
22R
GND
VPP
IO
22R
33pF33pF 33pF 33pF
ESDA6V8V6
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
GND
GND
Figure 33: Reference Circuit for SIM Interface with the 6-pin SIM Card Holder
In order to enhance the reliability and availability of the SIM card in application. Please follow the below
criteria in the SIM circuit design:






Keep layout of SIM card as close as possible to the module. Assure the possibility of the length of the
trace is less than 200mm.
Keep SIM card signal away from RF and VBAT alignment.
Assure the ground between module and SIM cassette short and wide. Keep the width of ground no
less than 0.5mm to maintain the same electric potential. The decouple capacitor of SIM_VDD is less
than 1uF and must be near to SIM cassette.
To avoid cross talk between SIM_DATA and SIM_CLK. Keep them away with each other and shield
them with surrounded ground
In order to offer good ESD protection, it is recommended to add TVS such as WILL
(http://www.willsemi.com) ESDA6V8AV6. The 22Ω resistors should be added in series between the
module and the SIM card so as to suppress the EMI spurious transmission and enhance the ESD
protection. Please to be noted that the SIM peripheral circuit should be close to the SIM card socket.
Place the RF bypass capacitors (33pF) close to the SIM card on all signals line for improving EMI.
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
49 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
3.10.2. 6-Pin SIM Cassette
As to the 6-pin SIM card holder, it is recommended to use Amphenol C707 10M006 512 2. Please visit
http://www.amphenol.com for more information.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Figure 34: Amphenol C707 10M006 512 2 SIM Card Holder
Table 17: Pin Description of Amphenol SIM Card Holder
Name
Pin
Description
C1
SIM card power supply
C2
SIM card reset
C3
SIM card clock
GND
C5
Ground
VPP
C6
Not connected
SIM_DATA
C7
SIM card data I/O
SIM_VDD
SIM_RST
SIM_CLK
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
50 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
3.11. ADC
The module provides an ADC channel to measure the value of voltage. Please give priority to the use of
ADC0 channel. The command AT+QADC can read the voltage value applied on ADC0 pin. For details of
this AT command, please refer to the document [1]. In order to improve the accuracy of ADC, the layout
of ADC should be surrounded by ground.
Table 18: Pin Definition of the ADC
Pin NO.
8
9
Pin Name
Description
AVDD
Reference voltage of ADC circuit
ADC0
Analog to digital converter.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Table 19: Characteristics of the ADC
Item
Voltage Range
Min.
Typ.
0
Max.
Units
2.8
V
ADC Resolution
10
bits
ADC Accuracy
2.7
mV
3.12. Behaviors of The RI
Table 20: Behaviors of the RI
State
Standby
RI Response
HIGH
Voicecall
Change to LOW, then:
1. Change to HIGH when call is established.
2. Use ATH to hang up the call, RI changes to HIGH.
3. Calling part hangs up, RI changes to HIGH first, and changes to LOW for
120ms indicating “NO CARRIER” as an URC, then changes to HIGH again.
4. Change to HIGH when SMS is received.
SMS
When a new SMS comes, the RI changes to LOW and holds low level for about
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
51 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
120ms, then changes to HIGH.
URC
Certain URCs can trigger 120ms low level on RI. For more details, please refer to
the document [1]
If the module is used as a caller, the RI would maintain high except the URC or SMS is received. On the
other hand, when it is used as a receiver, the timing of the RI is shown below.
RI
HIGH
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Off-hook by“ATA”
On-hook by “ATH”
LOW
Idle
SMS received
Ring
Figure 35: RI Behavior of Voice Calling as a Receiver
HIGH
RI
LOW
Idle
Calling
Talking
On-hook
Idle
Figure 36: RI Behavior as a Caller
HIGH
RI
120ms
LOW
Idle or
Talking
URC or
SMS received
Figure 37: RI Behavior of URC or SMS Received
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
52 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
3.13. Network Status Indication
The NETLIGHT signal can be used to drive a network status indicator LED. The working state of this pin
is listed in the following table.
Table 21: Working State of the NETLIGHT
State
Module Function
Off
The module is not running.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
64ms On/800ms Off
The module is not synchronized with network.
64ms On/2000ms Off
The module is synchronized with network.
64ms On/600ms Off
The GPRS data transmission after dialing the PPP connection.
A reference circuit is shown as below.
VBAT
Module
300R
NETLIGHT
4.7K
47K
Figure 38: Reference Design for NETLIGHT
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
53 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
3.14. RF Transmitting Signal Indication
RFTXMON will output a high level to indicate the RF transmission, 220us later GSM will transmit burst.
Table 22: Pin Definition of the RFTXMON
Name
Pin
Description
RFTXMON
25
Transmission signal indication
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
You can execute AT+QCFG=“RFTXburst”, 1 to enable the function.
The timing of the RFTXMON signal is shown below.
220us
577us
RFTXMON
Burst Transmission
Figure 39: RFTXMON Signal during Burst Transmission
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
54 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
4
Antenna Interface
M66 have two antenna interfaces, GSM antenna and BT antenna. The Pin 26 is the Bluetooth antenna
pad. The Pin 35 is the GSM antenna pad. The RF interface of the two antenna pad has an impedance of
50Ω.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
4.1. GSM Antenna Interface
There is a GSM antenna pad named RF_ANT for M66.
Table 23: Pin Definition of the RF_ANT
Name
GND
RF_ANT
GND
GND
Pin
Description
34
Ground
35
GSM antenna pad
36
Ground
37
Ground
4.1.1. Reference Design
The external antenna must be matched properly to achieve best performance, so the matching circuit is
necessary, the reference design for RF is shown as below.
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
55 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
0R
RF_ANT
NM
Module
NM
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Figure 40: Reference Design for GSM Antenna
M66 provides an RF antenna pad for antenna connection. The RF trace in host PCB connected to the
module RF antenna pad should be coplanar waveguide line or microstrip line, whose characteristic
impedance should be close to 50Ω. M66 comes with grounding pads which are next to the antenna pad in
order to give a better grounding. Besides, a π type match circuit is suggested to be used to adjust the RF
performance.
To minimize the loss on the RF trace and RF cable, take design into account carefully. The following table
shows the requirement on GSM antenna.
Table 24: Antenna Cable Requirements
Type
Requirements
GSM850/EGSM900
Cable insertion loss <1dB
DCS1800/PCS1900
Cable insertion loss <1.5dB
Table 25: Antenna Requirements
Type
Requirements
Frequency Range
Depending by frequency band (s) provided by the network operator
VSWR
≤2
Gain (dBi)
3
Max Input Power (W)
50
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
56 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
Input Impedance (Ω)
50
Polarization Type
Vertical
4.1.2. RF Output Power
Table 26: The Module Conducted RF Output Power
Frequency
GSM850
EGSM900
DCS1800
PCS1900
NOTE
Max.
Min.
33dBm±2dB
5dBm±5dB
33dBm±2dB
5dBm±5dB
30dBm±2dB
0dBm±5dB
30dBm±2dB
0dBm±5dB
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
In GPRS 4 slots TX mode, the max output power is reduced by 2.5dB. This design conforms to the GSM
specification as described in section 13.16 of 3GPP TS 51.010-1.
4.1.3. RF Receiving Sensitivity
Table 27: The Module Conducted RF Receiving Sensitivity
Frequency
GSM850
EGSM900
DCS1800
PCS1900
M66_Hardware_Design
Receive Sensitivity
< -109dBm
< -109dBm
< -109dBm
< -109dBm
Confidential / Released
57 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
4.1.4. Operating Frequencies
Table 28: The Module Operating Frequencies
Frequency
Receive
Transmit
ARFCH
GSM850
869~894MHz
824~849MHz
128~251
EGSM900
925~960MHz
880~915MHz
0~124, 975~1023
DCS1800
1805~1880MHz
1710~1785MHz
512~885
PCS1900
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
1930~1990MHz
1850~1910MHz
512~810
4.1.5. RF Cable Soldering
Soldering the RF cable to RF pad of module correctly will reduce the loss on the path of RF, please refer
to the following example of RF soldering.
Figure 41: RF Soldering Sample
4.2. Bluetooth Antenna Interface
M66 supports Bluetooth interface. Bluetooth is a wireless technology that allows devices to communicate,
or transmit date or voice, wirelessly over a short distance. It is described as a short-range communication
technology intended to replace the cables connecting portable and/or fixed devices while maintaining high
level of security. Bluetooth is standardized as IEEE802.15 and operates in the 2.4 GHz range using RF
technology.Its bandwidth is 1Mb/s.
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
58 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
M66 is fully compliant with Bluetooth specification 3.0. M66 supports profile including SPP, OPP and HFP.
The module provides a Bluetooth antenna pad named BT_ANT.
Table 29: Pin Definition of the BT_ANT
Name
Pin
Description
BT_ANT
26
BT antenna pad
GND
27
Ground
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
The external antenna must be matched properly to achieve best performance, so the matching circuit is
necessary, the connection is recommended as in the following figure:
0R
BT_ANT
Module
NM
NM
Figure 42: Reference Design for Bluetooth Antenna
There are some suggestions for placing components and RF trace lying for Bluetooth RF traces:



Antenna matching circuit should be closed to the antenna;
Keep the RF traces as 50Ω;
The RF traces should be kept far away from the high frequency signals and strong disturbing source.
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
59 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
5
Electrical, Reliability and Radio
Characteristics
5.1. Absolute Maximum Ratings
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Absolute maximum ratings for power supply and voltage on digital and analog pins of module are listed in
the following table:
Table 30: Absolute Maximum Ratings
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Unit
-0.3
+4.73
V
Peak Current of Power Supply
0
2
A
RMS Current of Power Supply (during one TDMA- frame)
0
0.7
A
Voltage at Digital Pins
-0.3
3.08
V
Voltage at Analog Pins
-0.3
3.08
V
Voltage at Digital/analog Pins in Power Down Mode
-0.25
0.25
V
VBAT
5.2. Operating Temperature
The operating temperature is listed in the following table:
Table 31: Operating Temperature
Parameter
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
Normal Temperature
-35
+25
+80
℃
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
60 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
Restricted Operation1)
-40 ~ -35
+80 ~ +85
℃
Storage Temperature
-45
+90
℃
NOTE
1)
When the module works within this temperature range, the deviation from the GSM specification may
occur. For example, the frequency error or the phase error will be increased.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
5.3. Power Supply Ratings
Table 32: The Module Power Supply Ratings
Parameter
VBAT
Description
Conditions
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
Supply voltage
Voltage must stay within the min/max
values, including voltage drop, ripple,
and spikes.
3.3
4.0
4.6
V
Voltage drop
during transmitting
burst
Maximum power control level on
GSM850 and GSM900.
400
mV
Power down mode
SLEEP mode @DRX=5
150
1.3
uA
mA
13
0.98
mA
mA
13
1.0
mA
mA
TALK mode
GSM850/EGSM 9001)
DCS1800/PCS19002)
195/204
129/145
mA
mA
DATA mode, GPRS (3Rx, 2Tx)
GSM850/EGSM 9001)
DCS1800/PCS19002)
340/355
214/262
mA
mA
DATA mode, GPRS (2 Rx,3Tx)
GSM850/EGSM 9001)
DCS1800/PCS19002)
485/512
298/369
mA
mA
DATA mode, GPRS (4 Rx,1Tx)
GSM850/EGSM 9001)
190/192
mA
Minimum functionality mode
AT+CFUN=0
IDLE mode
SLEEP mode
AT+CFUN=4
IDLE mode
SLEEP mode
IVBAT
Average supply
current
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
61 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
Peak supply
current (during
transmission
slot)
NOTE
1)
2)
3)
1)
DCS1800/PCS19002)
122/146
mA
DATA mode, GPRS (1Rx,4Tx)
GSM850/EGSM 9001)
DCS1800/PCS19002)
465/4743)
372/465
mA
mA
Maximum power control level on
GSM850 and GSM900.
1.6
2
A
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Power control level PCL 5.
Power control level PCL 0.
3)
Under the GSM850 and EGSM900 spectrum, the power of 1Rx and 4Tx has been reduced.
2)
5.4. Current Consumption
The values of current consumption are shown as below.
Table 33: The Module Current Consumption
Condition
Voice Call
GSM850
GSM900
DCS1800
PCS1900
Current Consumption
@power level #5 <250mA, Typical 195mA
@power level #12, Typical 81mA
@power level #19, Typical 62mA
@power level #5 <250mA, Typical 204mA
@power level #12, Typical 83mA
@power level #19, Typical 62mA
@power level #0 <200mA, Typical 129mA
@power level #7, Typical 71mA
@power level #15, Typical 59mA
@power level #0 <200mA, Typical 145mA
@power level #7, Typical 74mA
@power level #15, Typical 60mA
GPRS Data
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
62 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
DATA Mode, GPRS ( 3Rx, 2Tx ) CLASS12
GSM850
@power level #5 <500mA, Typical 340mA
EGSM900
@power level #5 <500mA, Typical 355mA
DCS1800
@power level #0 <400mA, Typical 214mA
PCS1900
@power level #0 <400mA, Typical 262mA
DATA Mode, GPRS ( 2Rx, 3Tx ) CLASS12
GSM850
EGSM900
DCS1800
PCS1900
@power level #5 <600mA, Typical 485mA
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
@power level #5 <600mA, Typical 512mA
@power level #0 <490mA, Typical 298mA
@power level #0 <490mA, Typical 369mA
DATA Mode, GPRS ( 4Rx,1Tx ) CLASS12
GSM850
EGSM900
DCS1800
PCS1900
@power level #5 <350mA, Typical 190mA
@power level #5 <350mA, Typical 192mA
@power level #0 <300mA, Typical 122mA
@power level #0 <300mA, Typical 146mA
DATA Mode, GPRS ( 1Rx, 4Tx ) CLASS12
GSM850
EGSM900
DCS1800
PCS1900
@power level #5 <660mA, Typical 465mA
@power level #5 <660mA, Typical 474mA
@power level #0 <530mA, Typical 372mA
@power level #0 <530mA, Typical 465mA
NOTE
GPRS Class 12 is the default setting. The module can be configured from GPRS Class 1 to Class 12.
Setting to lower GPRS class would make it easier to design the power supply for the module.
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
63 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
5.5. Electro-static Discharge
Although the GSM engine is generally protected against Electro-static Discharge (ESD), ESD protection
precautions should still be emphasized. Proper ESD handling and packaging procedures must be applied
throughout the processing, handling and operation of any applications using the module.
The measured ESD values of module are shown as the following table:
Table 34: The ESD Endurance (Temperature: 25ºC, Humidity: 45%)
Tested Point
VBAT, GND
RF_ANT
TXD, RXD
Others
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
M66_Hardware_Design
Contact Discharge
Air Discharge
±5KV
±10KV
±5KV
±10KV
±2KV
±4KV
±0.5KV
±1KV
Confidential / Released
64 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
6
Mechanical Dimensions
This chapter describes the mechanical dimensions of the module.
6.1. Mechanical Dimensions of Module
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Figure 43: M66 Module Top and Side Dimensions (Unit: mm)
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
65 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Figure 44: M66 Module Bottom Dimensions (Unit: mm)
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
66 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
6.2. Recommended Footprint
36
1
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
23
14
Figure 45: Recommended Footprint (Unit: mm)
NOTE
The module should keep about 3mm away from other components in the host PCB.
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
67 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
6.3. Top View of the Module
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Figure 46: Top View of the Module
6.4. Bottom View of the Module
Figure 47: Bottom View of the Module
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
68 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
7
Storage and Manufacturing
7.1. Storage
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
M66 module is distributed in a vacuum-sealed bag. The restriction for storage is shown as below.
Shelf life in the vacuum-sealed bag: 12 months at environments of <40ºC temperature and <90%RH.
After the vacuum-sealed bag is opened, devices that need to be mounted directly must be:


Mounted within 72 hours at the factory environment of ≤30ºC temperature and <60% RH.
Stored at <10% RH.
Devices require baking before mounting, if any circumstance below occurs.



When the ambient temperature is 23ºC±5ºC, humidity indication card shows the humidity is >10%
before opening the vacuum-sealed bag.
If ambient temperature is <30ºC and the humidity is <60%, the devices have not been mounted
during 72hours.
Stored at >10% RH.
If baking is required, devices should be baked for 48 hours at 125ºC±5ºC.
NOTE
As plastic container cannot be subjected to high temperature, devices must be removed prior to high
temperature (125ºC) bake. If shorter bake times are desired, refer to the IPC/JEDECJ-STD-033 for bake
procedure.
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
69 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
7.2. Soldering
The squeegee should push the paste on the surface of the stencil that makes the paste fill the stencil
openings and penetrate to the PCB. The force on the squeegee should be adjusted so as to produce a
clean stencil surface on a single pass. To ensure the module soldering quality, the thickness of stencil at
the hole of the module pads should be 0.2 mm for M66.For more details, please refer to document [13]
It is suggested that peak reflow temperature is from 235ºC to 245ºC (for SnAg3.0Cu0.5 alloy). Absolute
max reflow temperature is 260ºC. To avoid damage to the module when it was repeatedly heated, it is
suggested that the module should be mounted after the first panel has been reflowed. The following
picture is the actual diagram which we have operated.
℃
250
217
200
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Preheat
Heating
Cooling
Liquids
Temperature
200℃
40s~60s
160℃
150
70s~120s
100
Between 1~3℃/S
50
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
s
Time(s)
Figure 48: Ramp-Soak-Spike Reflow Profile
7.3. Packaging
The modules are stored in a vacuum-sealed bag which is ESD protected. It should not be opened until the
devices are ready to be soldered onto the application.
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
70 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
7.3.1. Tape and Reel Packaging
The reel is 330mm in diameter and each reel contains 250 modules.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Figure 49: Tape and Reel Specification
Figure 50: Dimensions of Reel
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
71 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
8
Appendix A Reference
Table 35: Related Documents
SN
Document Name
[1]
Quectel_M66_AT_Commands_Manual
AT commands manual
[2]
ITU-T Draft new recommendation
V.25ter
Serial asynchronous automatic dialing and control
[3]
GSM 07.07
Digital cellular telecommunications (Phase 2+); AT
command set for GSM Mobile Equipment (ME)
[4]
GSM 07.10
Support GSM 07.10 multiplexing protocol
GSM 07.05
Digital cellular telecommunications (Phase 2+); Use of
Data Terminal Equipment – Data Circuit terminating
Equipment (DTE – DCE) interface for Short Message
Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service (CBS)
GSM 11.14
Digital cellular telecommunications (Phase 2+);
Specification of the SIM Application Toolkit for the
Subscriber Identity module – Mobile Equipment (SIM –
ME) interface
[7]
GSM 11.11
Digital cellular telecommunications (Phase 2+);
Specification of the Subscriber Identity module – Mobile
Equipment (SIM – ME) interface
[8]
GSM 03.38
Digital cellular telecommunications (Phase 2+);
Alphabets and language-specific information
[9]
GSM 11.10
Digital cellular telecommunications (Phase 2); Mobile
Station (MS) conformance specification; Part 1:
Conformance specification
[10]
GSM_UART_Application_Note
UART port application note
[11]
GSM_FW_Upgrade_AN01
GSM Firmware upgrade application note
[12]
GSM_EVB_User_Guide
GSM EVB user guide
[13]
Module_Secondary_SMT_User_Guide
Module secondary SMT user guide
[5]
[6]
Remark
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
72 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
Table 36: Terms and Abbreviations
Abbreviation
Description
ADC
Analog-to-Digital Converter
AMR
Adaptive Multi-Rate
ARP
Antenna Reference Point
ASIC
Application Specific Integrated Circuit
BER
Bit Error Rate
BOM
BT
BTS
CHAP
CS
CSD
CTS
DAC
DRX
DSP
DCE
DTE
DTR
DTX
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Bill of Material
Bluetooth
Base Transceiver Station
Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol
Coding Scheme
Circuit Switched Data
Clear to Send
Digital-to-Analog Converter
Discontinuous Reception
Digital Signal Processor
Data Communications Equipment (typically module)
Data Terminal Equipment (typically computer, external controller)
Data Terminal Ready
Discontinuous Transmission
EFR
Enhanced Full Rate
EGSM
Enhanced GSM
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility
ESD
Electrostatic Discharge
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
73 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
ETS
European Telecommunication Standard
FCC
Federal Communications Commission (U.S.)
FDMA
Frequency Division Multiple Access
FR
Full Rate
GMSK
Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying
GPRS
General Packet Radio Service
GSM
Global System for Mobile Communications
G.W
HR
I/O
IC
IMEI
IOmax
kbps
LED
Li-Ion
MO
MOQ
MP
MS
MT
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Gross Weight
Half Rate
Input/Output
Integrated Circuit
International Mobile Equipment Identity
Maximum Output Load Current
Kilo Bits Per Second
Light Emitting Diode
Lithium-Ion
Mobile Originated
Minimum Order Quantity
Manufacture Product
Mobile Station (GSM engine)
Mobile Terminated
N.W
Net Weight
PAP
Password Authentication Protocol
PBCCH
Packet Switched Broadcast Control Channel
PCB
Printed Circuit Board
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
74 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
PDU
Protocol Data Unit
PPP
Point-to-Point Protocol
RF
Radio Frequency
RMS
Root Mean Square (value)
RTC
Real Time Clock
RX
Receive Direction
SIM
Subscriber Identification Module
SMS
TDMA
TE
TX
UART
URC
USSD
VSWR
VOmax
VOnorm
VOmin
VIHmax
VIHmin
VILmax
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Short Message Service
Time Division Multiple Access
Terminal Equipment
Transmitting Direction
Universal Asynchronous Receiver & Transmitter
Unsolicited Result Code
Unstructured Supplementary Service Data
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
Maximum Output Voltage Value
Normal Output Voltage Value
Minimum Output Voltage Value
Maximum Input High Level Voltage Value
Minimum Input High Level Voltage Value
Maximum Input Low Level Voltage Value
VILmin
Minimum Input Low Level Voltage Value
VImax
Absolute Maximum Input Voltage Value
VInorm
Absolute Normal Input Voltage Value
VImin
Absolute Minimum Input Voltage Value
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
75 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
VOHmax
Maximum Output High Level Voltage Value
VOHmin
Minimum Output High Level Voltage Value
VOLmax
Maximum Output Low Level Voltage Value
VOLmin
Minimum Output Low Level Voltage Value
Phonebook Abbreviations
LD
SIM Last Dialing phonebook (list of numbers most recently dialed)
MC
Mobile Equipment list of unanswered MT Calls (missed calls)
ON
RC
SM
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
SIM (or ME) Own Numbers (MSISDNs) list
Mobile Equipment list of Received Calls
SIM phonebook
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
76 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
9
Appendix B GPRS Coding Scheme
Four coding schemes are used in GPRS protocol. The differences between them are shown in the
following table.
Table 37: Description of Different Coding Schemes
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Scheme
Code
Rate
CS-1
1/2
CS-2
2/3
CS-3
3/4
CS-4
1
USF
Pre-coded
USF
Radio Block
excl.USF and
BCS
Tail
Coded
Bits
Punctured
Bits
Data
Rate
Kb/s
BCS
3
3
181
40
4
456
0
9.05
3
6
268
16
4
588
132
13.4
3
6
312
16
4
676
220
15.6
3
12
428
16
-
456
-
21.4
Radio block structure of CS-1, CS-2 and CS-3 is shown as the figure below.
Radio Block
BCS
USF
Rate 1/2 convolutional coding
Puncturing
456 bits
Figure 51: Radio Block Structure of CS-1, CS-2 and CS-3
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
77 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
Radio block structure of CS-4 is shown as the following figure.
Radio Block
BCS
USF
Block
Code
No coding
456 bits
Figure 52: Radio Block Structure of CS-4
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
78 / 79
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 Hardware Design
10 Appendix C GPRS Multi-slot Class
Twenty-nine classes of GPRS multi-slot modes are defined for MS in GPRS specification. Multi-slot
classes are product dependant, and determine the maximum achievable data rates in both the uplink and
downlink directions. Written as 3+1 or 2+2, the first number indicates the amount of downlink timeslots,
while the second number indicates the amount of uplink timeslots. The active slots determine the total
number of slots the GPRS device can use simultaneously for both uplink and downlink communications.
The description of different multi-slot classes is shown in the following table.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Table 38: GPRS Multi-slot Classes
Multislot Class
Downlink Slots
Uplink Slots
Active Slots
1
1
2
2
1
3
2
2
3
3
1
4
2
2
4
3
2
4
3
3
4
4
1
5
3
2
5
4
2
5
11
4
3
5
12
4
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
M66_Hardware_Design
Confidential / Released
79 / 79
M66
AT Commands Manual
GSM/GPRS Module Series
Rev. M66_AT_Commands_Manual_V1.0
Date: 2014-08-15
www.quectel.com
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Our aim is to provide customers with timely and comprehensive service. For any
assistance, please contact our company headquarters:
Quectel Wireless Solutions Co., Ltd.
Office 501, Building 13, No.99, Tianzhou Road, Shanghai, China, 200233
Tel: +86 21 5108 6236
Mail: [email protected]
Or our local office, for more information, please visit:
http://www.quectel.com/support/salesupport.aspx
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
For technical support, to report documentation errors, please visit:
http://www.quectel.com/support/techsupport.aspx
GENERAL NOTES
QUECTEL OFFERS THIS INFORMATION AS A SERVICE TO ITS CUSTOMERS. THE INFORMATION
PROVIDED IS BASED UPON CUSTOMERS’ REQUIREMENTS. QUECTEL MAKES EVERY EFFORT
TO ENSURE THE QUALITY OF THE INFORMATION IT MAKES AVAILABLE. QUECTEL DOES NOT
MAKE ANY WARRANTY AS TO THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN, AND DOES NOT ACCEPT
ANY LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY, LOSS OR DAMAGE OF ANY KIND INCURRED BY USE OF OR
RELIANCE UPON THE INFORMATION. ALL INFORMATION SUPPLIED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO
CHANGE WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE.
COPYRIGHT
THIS INFORMATION CONTAINED HERE IS PROPRIETARY TECHNICAL INFORMATION OF
QUECTEL CO., LTD. TRANSMITTABLE, REPRODUCTION, DISSEMINATION AND EDITING OF THIS
DOCUMENT AS WELL AS UTILIZATION OF THIS CONTENTS ARE FORBIDDEN WITHOUT
PERMISSION. OFFENDERS WILL BE HELD LIABLE FOR PAYMENT OF DAMAGES. ALL RIGHTS
ARE RESERVED IN THE EVENT OF A PATENT GRANT OR REGISTRATION OF A UTILITY MODEL
OR DESIGN.
Copyright © Quectel Wireless Solutions Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
1 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
About the Document
History
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Revision
Date
Author
Description
1.0
2014-08-15
Jelly WANG
Initial
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
2 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Contents
About the Document ................................................................................................................................... 2
Contents ....................................................................................................................................................... 3
Table Index ................................................................................................................................................... 9
1
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 10
1.1.
Scope of the Document ......................................................................................................... 10
1.2.
AT Command Syntax............................................................................................................. 10
1.2.1.
Combining AT Commands on the Same Command Line ........................................... 11
1.2.2.
Entering Successive AT Commands on Separate Lines ............................................ 11
1.3.
Supported Character Sets ..................................................................................................... 11
1.4.
Flow Control .......................................................................................................................... 12
1.4.1.
Software Flow Control (XON/XOFF Flow Control) ..................................................... 12
1.4.2.
Hardware Flow Control (RTS/CTS Flow Control) ....................................................... 13
1.5.
Unsolicited Result Code ........................................................................................................ 13
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
2
General Commands ........................................................................................................................... 14
2.1.
ATI Display Product Identification Information.................................................................... 14
2.2.
AT+GMI Request Manufacturer Identification .................................................................... 14
2.3.
AT+GMM Request TA Model Identification ......................................................................... 15
2.4.
AT+GMR Request TA Revision Identification of Software Release ................................... 15
2.5.
AT+GOI Request Global Object Identification .................................................................... 16
2.6.
AT+CGMI Request Manufacturer Identification .................................................................. 17
2.7.
AT+CGMM Request Model Identification ........................................................................... 17
2.8.
AT+CGMR Request TA Revision Identification of Software Release ................................. 17
2.9.
AT+GSN Request International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) .................................... 18
2.10.
AT+CGSN Request Product Serial Number Identification (Identical with +GSN) .............. 19
2.11.
AT+QGSN Request Product Serial Number Identification (IMEI) ...................................... 19
2.12.
AT&F Set all Current Parameters to Manufacturer Defaults .............................................. 20
2.13.
AT&V Display Current Configuration .................................................................................. 20
2.14.
AT&W Store Current Parameter to User Defined Profile.................................................... 22
2.15.
ATQ Set Result Code Presentation Mode .......................................................................... 23
2.16.
ATV TA Response Format .................................................................................................. 23
2.17.
ATX Set CONNECT Result Code Format and Monitor Call Progress ............................... 25
2.18.
ATZ Set all Current Parameters to User Defined Profile .................................................... 26
2.19.
AT+CFUN Set Phone Functionality .................................................................................... 26
2.20.
AT+QPOWD Power off ....................................................................................................... 28
2.21.
AT+CMEE Report Mobile Equipment Error ........................................................................ 28
2.22.
AT+CSCS Select TE Character Set ................................................................................... 29
2.23.
AT+GCAP Request Complete TA Capabilities List ............................................................. 31
3
Serial Interface Control Commands ................................................................................................ 32
3.1.
AT&C Set DCD Function Mode .......................................................................................... 32
3.2.
AT&D Set DTR Function Mode ........................................................................................... 32
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
3 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
AT+ICF Set TE-TA Control Character Framing .................................................................. 33
AT+IFC Set TE-TA Local Data Flow Control....................................................................... 34
AT+ILRR Set TE-TA Local Data Rate Reporting Mode ...................................................... 35
AT+IPR Set TE-TA Fixed Local Rate .................................................................................. 36
3.6.1.
Adaptive Baud ............................................................................................................. 38
3.7.
AT+CMUX Multiplexer Control............................................................................................ 39
4
Status Control Commands ............................................................................................................... 41
4.1.
AT+CEER Extended Error Report ...................................................................................... 41
4.2.
AT+CPAS Mobile Equipment Activity Status ...................................................................... 42
4.3.
AT+QINDRI Indicate RI When Using URC ......................................................................... 43
4.4.
AT+QMOSTAT Show State of Mobile Originated Call ........................................................ 44
4.5.
AT+QIURC Enable or Disable Initial URC Presentation .................................................... 45
4.6.
AT+QEXTUNSOL Enable/Disable Proprietary Unsolicited Indications .............................. 45
4.7.
AT+QINISTAT Query State of Initialization ......................................................................... 47
4.8.
AT+QNSTATUS Query GSM Network Status..................................................................... 48
4.9.
AT+QNITZ Network Time Synchronization......................................................................... 48
4.10.
AT+QLTS Obtain Latest Network Time Synchronized ....................................................... 49
4.11.
AT+QCGTIND Circuit Switched Call or GPRS PDP Context Termination Indication ........ 50
4.12.
AT+CTZU Network Time Synchronization and Update the RTC Time .............................. 51
4.13.
AT+CTZR Network Time Synchronization Report .............................................................. 52
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
5
SIM Related Commands .................................................................................................................... 53
5.1.
AT+CIMI Request International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) .................................... 53
5.2.
AT+CLCK Facility Lock ....................................................................................................... 54
5.3.
AT+CPIN Enter PIN ............................................................................................................ 56
5.4.
AT+CPWD Change Password ............................................................................................ 57
5.5.
AT+CRSM Restricted SIM Access...................................................................................... 59
5.6.
AT+QCSPWD Change PS Super Password ...................................................................... 60
5.7.
AT+QCCID Show CCID ...................................................................................................... 60
5.8.
AT+QGID Get SIM Card Group Identifier ........................................................................... 61
5.9.
AT+QSIMVOL Select SIM Card Operating Voltage............................................................ 62
5.10.
AT+QSPN Get Service Provider Name from SIM .............................................................. 62
5.11.
AT+QTRPIN Times Remain to Input SIM PIN/PUK ........................................................... 63
6
Network Service Commands ............................................................................................................ 64
6.1.
AT+COPS Operator Selection ............................................................................................ 64
6.2.
AT+CREG Network Registration ........................................................................................ 66
6.3.
AT+CSQ Signal Quality Report .......................................................................................... 67
6.4.
AT+CPOL Preferred Operator List...................................................................................... 68
6.5.
AT+COPN Read Operator Names...................................................................................... 69
6.6.
AT+QBAND Get and Set Mobile Operation Band .............................................................. 70
6.7.
AT+QENG Switch on or off Engineering Mode .................................................................. 71
6.8.
AT+QSCANF Scan Power of GSM Frequency .................................................................. 74
6.9.
AT+QLOCKF Lock GSM Frequency .................................................................................. 75
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
4 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
7
8
Call Related Commands .................................................................................................................... 76
7.1.
ATA Answer an Incoming Call............................................................................................. 76
7.2.
ATD Mobile Originated Call to Dial a Number .................................................................... 77
7.3.
ATH Disconnect Existing Connection ................................................................................. 78
7.4.
+++ Switch from Data Mode to Command Mode ............................................................... 79
7.5.
ATO Switch from Command Mode to Data Mode .............................................................. 80
7.6.
ATP Select Pulse Dialing .................................................................................................... 80
7.7.
ATS0 Set Number of Rings before Automatically Answering Call...................................... 81
7.8.
ATS6 Set Pause before Blind Dialing ................................................................................. 81
7.9.
ATS7 Set Number of Seconds to Wait for Connection Completion ................................... 82
7.10.
ATS8 Set the Number of Seconds to Wait for Comma Dial Modifier ................................. 83
7.11.
ATS10 Set Disconnect Delay after Indicating the Absence of Data Carrier ....................... 83
7.12.
ATT Select Tone Dialing...................................................................................................... 84
7.13.
AT+CSTA Select Type of Address ...................................................................................... 84
7.14.
AT+CLCC List Current Calls of ME .................................................................................... 85
7.15.
AT+CR Service Reporting Control ...................................................................................... 86
7.16.
AT+CRC Set Cellular Result Codes for Incoming Call Indication ...................................... 87
7.17.
AT+CRLP Select Radio Link Protocol Parameter .............................................................. 89
7.18.
AT+CSNS Single Numbering Scheme ............................................................................... 90
7.19.
AT+CMOD Configure Alternating Mode Calls .................................................................... 90
7.20.
AT+QSFR Preference Speech Coding ............................................................................... 91
7.21.
AT+QSPCH Speech Channel Type Report ........................................................................ 92
7.22.
AT+QDISH Disable ATH ..................................................................................................... 93
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
SMS Commands ................................................................................................................................. 94
8.1.
AT+CSMS Select Message Service ................................................................................... 94
8.2.
AT+CMGF Select SMS Message Format........................................................................... 95
8.3.
AT+CSCA SMS Service Center Address............................................................................ 95
8.4.
AT+CPMS Preferred SMS Message Storage ..................................................................... 97
8.5.
AT+CMGD Delete SMS Message ...................................................................................... 98
8.6.
AT+CMGL List SMS Messages from Preferred Store ........................................................ 99
8.7.
AT+CMGR Read SMS Message ...................................................................................... 102
8.8.
AT+CMGS Send SMS Message....................................................................................... 105
8.9.
AT+CMGW Write SMS Message to Memory ................................................................... 107
8.10.
AT+CMSS Send SMS Message from Storage ................................................................. 108
8.11.
AT+CMGC Send SMS Command .................................................................................... 109
8.12.
AT+CNMI New SMS Message Indications ....................................................................... 110
8.13.
AT+CRES Restore SMS Settings ..................................................................................... 113
8.14.
AT+CSAS Save SMS Settings ......................................................................................... 114
8.15.
AT+CSCB Select Cell Broadcast SMS Messages ........................................................... 114
8.16.
AT+CSDH Show SMS Text Mode Parameters ................................................................. 115
8.17.
AT+CSMP Set SMS Text Mode Parameters .................................................................... 116
8.18.
AT+QCLASS0 Store Class 0 SMS to SIM when Receiving Class 0 SMS ....................... 117
8.19.
AT+QMGDA Delete all SMS ............................................................................................. 119
8.20.
AT+QSMSCODE Configure SMS Code Mode ................................................................. 119
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
5 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
9
Phonebook Commands ................................................................................................................... 121
9.1.
AT+CPBS Select Phonebook Memory Storage ............................................................... 121
9.2.
AT+CPBW Write Phonebook Entry .................................................................................. 122
9.3.
AT+CPBR Read Current Phonebook Entries ................................................................... 123
9.4.
AT+CPBF Find Phonebook Entries .................................................................................. 124
9.5.
AT+CNUM Subscriber Number ........................................................................................ 125
10 GPRS Commands ............................................................................................................................ 127
10.1.
AT+CGATT Attach to/Detach from GPRS Service ........................................................... 127
10.2.
AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context ................................................................................ 128
10.3.
AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested)...................................................... 129
10.4.
AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable) ....................................... 130
10.5.
AT+CGACT PDP Context Activate or Deactivate ............................................................. 131
10.6.
AT+CGDATA Enter Data State.......................................................................................... 132
10.7.
AT+CGPADDR Show PDP Address ................................................................................. 133
10.8.
AT+CGCLASS GPRS Mobile Station Class ..................................................................... 134
10.9.
AT+CGEREP Control Unsolicited GPRS Event Reporting .............................................. 135
10.10. AT+CGREG Network Registration Status ........................................................................ 136
10.11. AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages ....................................................... 137
10.12. AT+QGPCLASS Change GPRS Multi-slot Class ............................................................. 138
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
11 TCPIP Commands ............................................................................................................................ 139
11.1.
AT+QIOPEN Start up TCP or UDP Connection ............................................................... 139
11.2.
AT+QISEND Send Data through TCP or UDP Connection .............................................. 140
11.3.
AT+QICLOSE Close TCP or UDP Connection ................................................................. 141
11.4.
AT+QIDEACT Deactivate GPRS/CSD PDP Context ....................................................... 142
11.5.
AT+QILPORT Set Local Port ............................................................................................ 143
11.6.
AT+QIREGAPP Start TCPIP Task and Set APN, User Name and Password .................. 144
11.7.
AT+QIACT Activate GPRS/CSD Context ......................................................................... 145
11.8.
AT+QILOCIP Get Local IP Address .................................................................................. 145
11.9.
AT+QISTAT Query Current Connection Status ................................................................ 146
11.10. AT+QISTATE Query Connection Status of the Current Access ....................................... 147
11.11. AT+QISSTAT Query the Current Server Status ................................................................ 149
11.12. AT+QIDNSCFG Configure Domain Name Server ............................................................ 150
11.13. AT+QIDNSGIP Query the IP Address of Given Domain Name ....................................... 150
11.14. AT+QIDNSIP Connect with IP Address or Domain Name Server .................................... 151
11.15. AT+QIHEAD Add an IP Header when Receiving Data .................................................... 152
11.16. AT+QIAUTOS Set Auto Sending Timer ............................................................................ 153
11.17. AT+QIPROMPT Set Prompt of ‘>’ when Sending Data .................................................... 153
11.18. AT+QISERVER Configured as Server.............................................................................. 154
11.19. AT+QICSGP Select CSD or GPRS as the Bearer ........................................................... 155
11.20. AT+QISRVC Choose Connection ..................................................................................... 156
11.21. AT+QISHOWRA Set Whether or Not to Display the Address of Sender ......................... 157
11.22. AT+QISCON Save TCPIP Application Context ................................................................ 158
11.23. AT+QIMODE Select TCPIP Transfer Mode ...................................................................... 159
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
6 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
11.24.
11.25.
11.26.
11.27.
11.28.
11.29.
11.30.
11.31.
11.32.
11.33.
11.34.
AT+QITCFG Configure Transparent Transfer Mode ........................................................ 160
AT+QISHOWPT Control Whether or Not to Show the Protocol Type .............................. 161
AT+QIMUX Control Whether or Not to Enable Multiple TCPIP Session .......................... 162
AT+QISHOWLA Control Whether or Not to Display Local IP Address ............................ 163
AT+QIFGCNT Select a Context as Foreground Context ................................................. 163
AT+QISACK Query the Data Information for Sending ..................................................... 164
AT+QINDI Set the Method to Handle Received TCP/IP Data .......................................... 165
AT+QIRD Retrieve the Received TCP/IP Data ................................................................ 166
AT+QISDE Control Whether or Not to Echo the Data for QISEND ................................. 167
AT+QPING Ping a Remote Server ................................................................................... 168
AT+QNTP Synchronize the Local Time Via NTP ............................................................. 169
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
12 Supplementary Service Commands .............................................................................................. 171
12.1.
AT+CCFC Call Forwarding Number and Conditions Control ........................................... 171
12.2.
AT+CCUG Closed User Group Control ............................................................................ 173
12.3.
AT+CCWA Call Waiting Control ........................................................................................ 174
12.4.
AT+CHLD Call Hold and Multiparty .................................................................................. 175
12.5.
AT+CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation ............................................................. 177
12.6.
AT+QCLIP Control Whether or Not to Show the Name of Incoming Call Number .......... 179
12.7.
AT+CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction ................................................................ 180
12.8.
AT+COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation .................................................... 181
12.9.
AT+QCOLP Show Alpha Field in +COLP String ............................................................... 182
12.10. AT+CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data .................................................... 183
12.11. AT+CSSN Supplementary Services Notification .............................................................. 184
13 Audio Commands ............................................................................................................................ 186
13.1.
ATL Set Monitor Speaker Loudness ................................................................................. 186
13.2.
ATM Set Monitor Speaker Mode....................................................................................... 186
13.3.
AT+VTD Tone Duration ..................................................................................................... 187
13.4.
AT+VTS DTMF and Tone Generation............................................................................... 188
13.5.
AT+CALM Alert Sound Mode ........................................................................................... 189
13.6.
AT+CRSL Ringer Sound Level ......................................................................................... 189
13.7.
AT+CLVL Loud Speaker Volume Level............................................................................. 190
13.8.
AT+CMUT Mute Control ................................................................................................... 191
13.9.
AT+QSIDET Change the Side Tone Gain Level ............................................................... 191
13.10. AT+QMIC Change the Microphone Gain Level ................................................................ 192
13.11. AT+QLDTMF Generate Local DTMF Tones ..................................................................... 193
13.12. AT+QAUDCH Swap the Audio Channels ......................................................................... 194
13.13. AT+QAUDLOOP Audio Channel Loop Back Test ............................................................ 194
13.14. AT+QLTONE Generate Local Specific Tone ..................................................................... 195
13.15. AT+QTONEP Set DTMF Output Path .............................................................................. 196
13.16. AT+QTDMOD Set Tone Detection Mode .......................................................................... 197
13.17. AT+QTONEDET Detect DTMF ......................................................................................... 198
13.18. AT+QWDTMF Play DTMF Tone During the Call .............................................................. 200
14 Hardware Related Commands ........................................................................................................ 202
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
7 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
14.1.
14.2.
14.3.
14.4.
14.5.
AT+CCLK Clock ................................................................................................................ 202
AT+QALARM Set Alarm.................................................................................................... 203
AT+CBC Battery Charge................................................................................................... 204
AT+QSCLK Configure Slow Clock.................................................................................... 204
AT+QLEDMODE Configure the Network LED Patterns ................................................... 205
15 Others Commands ........................................................................................................................... 206
15.1.
A/ Re-issues the Last Command Given ........................................................................... 206
15.2.
ATE Set Command Echo Mode ........................................................................................ 206
15.3.
ATS3 Set Command Line Termination Character ............................................................ 207
15.4.
ATS4 Set Response Formatting Character ...................................................................... 207
15.5.
ATS5 Set Command Line Editing Character .................................................................... 208
15.6.
AT+DS V.42bis Data Compression Control ...................................................................... 208
15.7.
AT+DR V.42bis Data Compression Reporting Control ..................................................... 209
15.8.
AT+QRIMODE Set RI Time .............................................................................................. 210
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
16 Appendix ........................................................................................................................................... 212
16.1.
Related Documents ............................................................................................................. 212
16.2.
Terms and Abbreviations ..................................................................................................... 212
16.3.
Factory Default Settings Restorable with AT&F .................................................................. 213
16.4.
AT Command Settings Storable with AT&W ........................................................................ 215
16.5.
AT Command Settings Storable with ATZ ........................................................................... 218
16.6.
Summary of URC ................................................................................................................ 220
16.7.
Summary of CME ERROR Codes ...................................................................................... 222
16.8.
Summary of CMS ERROR Codes ...................................................................................... 226
16.9.
Summary of Cause for Extended Error Report ................................................................... 228
16.9.1.
Location ID for the Extended Error Report ............................................................... 228
16.9.2.
Cause for Protocol Stack (PS) Layer ........................................................................ 228
16.9.3.
Internal Cause for MM Layer..................................................................................... 241
16.9.4.
Cause for PPP/IP-Stack ............................................................................................ 242
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
8 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Table Index
TABLE 1: TYPES OF AT COMMANDS AND RESPONSES .............................................................................. 11
TABLE 2: AT&V DISPLAY CURRENT CONFIGURATION LIST ....................................................................... 21
TABLE 3: ATV0&ATV1 RESULT CODES NUMERIC EQUIVALENTS AND BRIEF DESCRIPTIONS .............. 24
TABLE 4: RELATED DOCUMENTS ................................................................................................................ 212
TABLE 5: TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS ...................................................................................................... 212
TABLE 6: FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS RESTORABLE WITH AT&F ...................................................... 213
TABLE 7: AT COMMAND SETTINGS STORABLE WITH AT&W .................................................................... 215
TABLE 8: AT COMMAND SETTINGS STORABLE WITH ATZ ....................................................................... 218
TABLE 9: SUMMARY OF URC ....................................................................................................................... 220
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
TABLE 10: DIFFERENT CODING SCHEMES OF +CME ERROR: <ERR> ................................................... 222
TABLE 11: DIFFERENT CODING SCHEMES OF +CMS ERROR: <ERR> ................................................... 226
TABLE 12: LOCATION ID FOR THE EXTENDED ERROR REPORT ............................................................ 228
TABLE 13: CAUSE FOR PROTOCOL STACK (PS) LAYER ........................................................................... 228
TABLE 14: INTERNAL CAUSE FOR MM LAYER ........................................................................................... 241
TABLE 15: CAUSE FOR PPP/IP-STACK ........................................................................................................ 242
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
9 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
1
Introduction
1.1. Scope of the Document
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
This document presents the AT Commands Set for Quectel cellular engine M66.
1.2. AT Command Syntax
The “AT” or “at” prefix must be set at the beginning of each command line. To terminate a command line
enter
<CR>.
Commands
are
usually
followed
by
a
response
that
includes
“<CR><LF><response><CR><LF>”. Throughout this document, only the responses are presented,
“<CR><LF>” are omitted intentionally.
The AT Commands Set implemented by M66 is a combination of GSM07.05, GSM07.07 and ITU-T
recommendation V.25ter and the AT Commands developed by Quectel.
All these AT Commands can be split into three categories syntactically: “basic”, “S parameter”, and
“extended”. They are listed as follows:
 Basic syntax
These AT Commands have the format of “AT<x><n>”, or “AT&<x><n>”, where “<x>” is the command,
and “<n>” is/are the argument(s) for that command. An example of this is “ATE<n>”, which tells the DCE
whether received characters should be echoed back to the DTE according to the value of “<n>”. “<n>” is
optional and a default will be used if it is missing.
 S parameter syntax
These AT Commands have the format of “ATS<n>=<m>”, where “<n>” is the index of the S register to set,
and “<m>” is the value to assign to it. “<m>” is optional; if it is missing, then a default value is assigned.
 Extended syntax
These commands can be operated in several modes, as following table:
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
10 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Table 1: Types of AT Commands and Responses
Test Command
AT+<x>=?
This command returns the list of parameters and value ranges
set by the corresponding Write Command or internal
processes.
Read Command
AT+<x>?
This command returns the currently set value of the parameter
or parameters.
Write Command
AT+<x>=<…>
This command sets the user-definable parameter values.
Execution
Command
AT+<x>
This command reads non-variable parameters affected by
internal processes in the GSM engine
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
1.2.1. Combining AT Commands on the Same Command Line
You can enter several AT Commands on the same line. In this case, you do not need to type the “AT” or
“at” prefix before every command. Instead, you only need to type “AT” or “at” at the beginning of the
command line. Please note that use a semicolon as command delimiter.
The command line buffer can accept a maximum of 256 characters. If the input characters exceeded the
maximum then no command will be executed and TA will return “ERROR”.
1.2.2. Entering Successive AT Commands on Separate Lines
When you need to enter a series of AT Commands on separate lines, please note that you need to wait
the final response (for example OK, CME error, CMS error) of the last AT command you entered before
you enter the next AT command.
1.3. Supported Character Sets
The M66 AT Command interface defaults to the IRA character set. The M66 supports the following
character sets:






GSM
UCS2
HEX
IRA
PCCP437
8859-1
The character set can be configured and interrogated using the “AT+CSCS” command (GSM 07.07). The
character set is defined in GSM specification 07.05. The character set affects transmission and reception
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
11 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
of SMS and SMS Cell Broadcast Messages, the entry and display of phone book entries text field and
SIM Application Toolkit alpha strings.
1.4. Flow Control
Flow control is very important for correct communication between the GSM engine and DTE. For example,
in the case such as a data or FAX call, the sending device is transferring data faster than the receiving
side is ready to accept. When the receiving buffer reaches its capacity, the receiving device should be
capable to cause the sending device to pause until it catches up.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
There are basically two approaches to achieve data flow control: software flow control and hardware flow
control. M66 supports both two kinds of flow control.
In Multiplex mode, it is recommended to use the hardware flow control.
The default flow control approach of M66 is closed.
1.4.1. Software Flow Control (XON/XOFF Flow Control)
Software flow control sends different characters to stop (XOFF, decimal 19) and resume (XON, decimal
17) data flow. It is quite useful in some applications that only use three wires on the serial interface.
The default flow control approach of M66 is closed, to enable software flow control in the DTE interface
and within GSM engine, type the following AT command:
AT+IFC=1, 1<CR>
This setting is stored volatile, for use after restart, AT+IFC=1, 1<CR> should be stored to the user profile
with AT&W<CR>.
Ensure that any communication software package (e.g. ProComm Plus, Hyper Terminal or WinFax Pro)
uses software flow control.
NOTE
Software Flow Control should not be used for data calls where binary data will be transmitted or received
(e.g. TCP/IP), because the DTE interface may interpret binary data as flow control characters.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
12 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
1.4.2. Hardware Flow Control (RTS/CTS Flow Control)
The default flow control approach of M66 is closed, to enable hardware flow control (RTS/CTS flow
control) in the DTE interface and within GSM engine, type the following AT command:
AT+IFC=2, 2<CR>
This setting is stored volatile, for use after restart, AT+IFC=2, 2<CR> should be stored to the user profile
with AT&W<CR>.
Hardware flow control achieves the data flow control by controlling the RTS/CTS line. When the data
transfer should be suspended, the CTS line is set inactive until the transfer from the receiving buffer has
completed. When the receiving buffer is ok to receive more data, CTS goes active once again.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
To achieve hardware flow control, ensure that the RTS/CTS lines are present on your application platform.
1.5. Unsolicited Result Code
A URC is a report message sent from the ME to the TE. An unsolicited result code can either be delivered
automatically when an event occurs, to reflect change in system state or as a result of a query the ME
received before, often due to occurrences of errors in executing the queries. However, a URC is not
issued as a direct response to an executed AT command. AT commands have their own implementations
to validate inputs such as “OK” or “ERROR”.
Typical URCs may be information about incoming calls, received SMS, changing temperature, status of
the battery etc. A summary of URCs is listed in Appendix.
When sending a URC, the ME activates its Ring Interrupt (Logic “l”), i.e. the line goes active low for a few
milliseconds. If an event which delivers a URC coincides with the execution of an AT command, the URC
will be output after command execution has completed.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
13 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
2
General Commands
2.1. ATI
ATI
Display Product Identification Information
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Display Product Identification Information
Execution Command
ATI
Response
TA issues product information text.
Quectel_Ltd
Quectel_M66
Revision: M66FARxxAxx
OK
Maximum Response Time
Reference
V.25ter
Example
300ms
ATI
Quectel_Ltd
Quectel_M66
Revision: M66FAR01A01
OK
2.2. AT+GMI
AT+GMI
Request Manufacturer Identification
Request Manufacturer Identification
Test Command
AT+GMI=?
Response
OK
Execution Command
AT+GMI
Response
TA reports one or more lines of information text which permit
the user to identify the manufacturer.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
14 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Quectel_Ltd
Quectel_M66
Revision: MTK 0828
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
V.25ter
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
2.3. AT+GMM
Request TA Model Identification
AT+GMM Request TA Model Identification
Test Command
AT+GMM=?
Execution Command
AT+GMM
Response
OK
Response
TA returns a product model identification text.
Quectel_M66
OK
Maximum Response Time
Reference
V.25ter
300ms
2.4. AT+GMR Request TA Revision Identification of Software Release
AT+GMR Request TA Revision Identification of Software Release
Test Command
AT+GMR=?
Execution Command
AT+GMR
Response
OK
Response
TA reports one or more lines of information text which permit
the user to identify the revision of software release.
Revision: <revision>
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
V.25ter
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
15 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Parameter
Revision of software release
<revision>
Example
AT+GMR
Revision: M66FAR01A01
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
2.5. AT+GOI
AT+GOI
Request Global Object Identification
Request Global Object Identification
Test Command
AT+GOI=?
Response
OK
Execution Command
AT+GOI
Response
TA reports one or more lines of information text which permit
the user to identify the device, based on the ISO system for
registering unique object identifiers.
<Object Id>
OK
Maximum Response Time
Reference
V.25ter
Parameter
<Object Id>
300ms
Identifier of device type
NOTE
See X.208, 209 for the format of <Object Id>. For example, in M66 wireless module, string “M66” is
displayed.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
16 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
2.6. AT+CGMI
AT+CGMI
Request Manufacturer Identification
Request Manufacturer Identification
Test Command
AT+CGMI=?
Response
OK
Execution Command
AT+CGMI
Response
TA returns manufacturer identification text.
Quectel_Ltd
Quectel_M66
Revision: MTK 0828
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
OK
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
2.7. AT+CGMM
AT+CGMM
Test Command
AT+CGMM=?
300ms
Request Model Identification
Request Model Identification
Response
OK
Execution Command
AT+CGMM
Response
TA returns product model identification text.
Quectel_M66
OK
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
2.8. AT+CGMR
300ms
Request TA Revision Identification of Software Release
AT+CGMR Request TA Revision Identification of Software Release
Test Command
AT+CGMR=?
Response
OK
Execution Command
AT+CGMR
Response
TA returns product software version identification text.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
17 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Revision: <revision>
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
Product software version identification text
<revision>
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
2.9. AT+GSN
AT+GSN
Request International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI)
Request International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI)
Test Command
AT+GSN=?
Execution Command
AT+GSN
Response
OK
Response
TA reports the IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity)
number in information text which permit the user to identify
the individual ME device.
<sn>
OK
Maximum Response Time
Reference
V.25ter
Parameter
<sn>
300ms
IMEI of the telephone
NOTE
The serial number (IMEI) is varied with the individual ME device.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
18 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
2.10. AT+CGSN
Request Product Serial Number Identification (Identical
with +GSN)
AT+CGSN Request Product Serial Number Identification (Identical with +GSN)
Test Command
AT+CGSN=?
Response
OK
Execution Command
AT+CGSN
Response
<sn>
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
NOTE
See +GSN.
2.11. AT+QGSN
300ms
Request Product Serial Number Identification (IMEI)
AT+QGSN Request Product Serial Number Identification (IMEI)
Test Command
AT+QGSN=?
Execution Command
AT+QGSN
Response
OK
Response
+QGSN: <sn>
OK
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
300ms
Parameter
<sn>
A string parameter which indicates the IMEI of the telephone
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
19 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
NOTE
The serial number (IMEI) is varied with the individual ME device.
Example
AT+QGSN
+QGSN: "865734020000749"
//Query the IMEI
OK
2.12. AT&F
AT&F
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Set all Current Parameters to Manufacturer Defaults
Set all Current Parameters to Manufacturer Defaults
Execution Command
AT&F[<value>]
Response
TA sets all current parameters to the manufacturer defined
profile.
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
V.25ter
Parameter
0
<value>
2.13. AT&V
AT&V
Set all TA parameters to manufacturer defaults
Display Current Configuration
Display Current Configuration
Execution Command
AT&V[<n>]
Response
TA returns the current parameter setting.
ACTIVE PROFILE
<current configurations text>
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
20 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
V.25ter
Parameter
<n>
0
Profile number
Table 2: AT&V Display Current Configuration List
AT&V or AT&V0
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
AT&V
ACTIVE PROFILE
E: 1
Q: 0
V: 1
X: 4
S0: 0
S2: 43
S3: 13
S4: 10
S5: 8
S6: 2
S7: 60
S8: 2
S10: 15
+CR: 0
+FCLASS: 0
+CMGF: 0
+CSDH: 0
+ILRR: 0
+CMEE: 1
+CBST: 7,0,1
+IFC: 0,0
+ICF: 3,3
+CNMI: 2,1,0,0,0
+CSCS: "GSM"
+IPR: 0
&C: 1
&D: 0
+CSTA: 129
+CRLP: 61,61,128,6,0,3
+CCWE: 0
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
21 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
+QSIMSTAT: 0
+CMUX: -1
+CCUG: 0,10,0
+CLIP: 0
+COLP: 0
+CCWA: 0
+CAOC: 1
+CLIR: 0
+CUSD: 0
+CREG: 0
+QSIMDET: 0,0,0
+QMIC: 4,9,8
+QECHO(NORMAL_AUDIO): 253,96,16388,57351,0
+QECHO(Earphone_AUDIO): 253,0,10756,57351,1
+QECHO(LoudSpk_AUDIO): 224,96,5256,57351,2
+QSIDET(NORMAL_AUDIO): 80
+QSIDET(HEADSET_AUDIO): 144
+QCLIP: 0
+QCOLP: 0
+CSNS: 0
OK
2.14. AT&W
AT&W
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Store Current Parameter to User Defined Profile
Store Current Parameter to User Defined Profile
Execution Command
AT&W[<n>]
Response
TA stores the current parameter setting in the user defined
profile.
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
V.25ter
Parameter
<n>
0
Profile number to store to
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
22 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
NOTE
The profile defined by user is stored in nonvolatile memory.
2.15. ATQ
ATQ
Set Result Code Presentation Mode
Set Result Code Presentation Mode
Execution Command
ATQ[<n>]
Response
This parameter setting determines whether or not the TA
transmits any result code to the TE. Information text
transmitted in response is not affected by this setting.
If <n>=0:
OK
If <n>=1:
(none)
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
V.25ter
Parameter
0
1
<n>
2.16. ATV
ATV
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
TA transmits result code
Result codes are suppressed and not transmitted
TA Response Format
TA Response Format
Execution Command
ATV[<value>]
Response
This parameter setting determines the contents of the header
and trailer transmitted with result codes and information
responses.
When <value>=0
0
When <value>=1
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
23 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Reference
V.25ter
Parameter
<value>
0
Information response: <text><CR><LF>
Short result code format: <numeric code><CR>
Information response: <CR><LF><text><CR><LF>
Long result code format: <CR><LF><verbose code><CR><LF>
1
NOTE
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
The result codes, their numeric equivalents and brief descriptions of the use of each are listed in the
following table.
Example
ATV1
OK
AT+CSQ
+CSQ: 30,0
OK
ATV0
0
AT+CSQ
+CSQ: 30,0
0
//Set <value>=1
//When <value>=1 result code is OK
//Set <value>=0
//When <value>=0 result code is 0
Table 3: ATV0&ATV1 Result Codes Numeric Equivalents and Brief Descriptions
ATV1
ATV0
Description
0
Acknowledges execution of a command
CONNECT
1
A connection has been established; the DCE is moving
from command state to online data state
RING
2
The DCE has detected an incoming call signal from
network
NO CARRIER
3
The connection has been terminated or the attempt to
establish a connection failed
ERROR
4
Command not recognized, command line maximum
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
24 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
length exceeded, parameter value invalid, or other
problem with processing the command line
NO DIALTONE
6
No dial tone detected
BUSY
7
Engaged (busy) signal detected
NO ANSWER
8
"@" (Wait for Quiet Answer) dial modifier was used, but
remote ringing followed by five seconds of silence was
not detected before expiration of the connection timer
(S7)
PROCEEDING
9
An AT command is being processed
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
CONNECT <text>
2.17. ATX
ATX
Same as CONNECT, but includes manufacturerspecific text that may specify DTE speed, line speed,
error control, data compression, or other status
Manufacturer-specific
Set CONNECT Result Code Format and Monitor Call Progress
Set CONNECT Result Code Format and Monitor Call Progress
Execution Command
ATX[<value>]
Response
This parameter setting determines whether or not the TA
detected the presence of dial tone and busy signal and
whether or not TA transmits particular result codes.
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
V.25ter
Parameter
<value>
0
1
2
3
4
CONNECT result code only returned, dial tone and busy detection are both
disabled
CONNECT<text> result code only returned, dial tone and busy detection are
both disabled
CONNECT<text> result code returned, dial tone detection is enabled, busy
detection is disabled
CONNECT<text> result code returned, dial tone detection is disabled, busy
detection is enabled
CONNECT<text> result code returned, dial tone and busy detection are both
enabled
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
25 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
NOTES
1.
2.
If parameter is omitted, the command has the same behavior of ATX0.
The factory default is <value>=4.
2.18. ATZ
Set all Current Parameters to User Defined Profile
ATZ Set all Current Parameters to User Defined Profile
Execution Command
ATZ[<value>]
Response
TA sets all current parameters to the user defined profile.
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
V.25ter
Parameter
<value>
NOTES
1.
2.
3.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
0
Reset to profile number 0
Profile defined by user is stored in nonvolatile memory.
If the user profile is invalid, it will default to the factory default profile.
Any additional commands on the same command line are ignored.
2.19. AT+CFUN
Set Phone Functionality
AT+CFUN Set Phone Functionality
Test Command
AT+CFUN=?
Response
+CFUN: (list of supported <fun>s), (list of supported <rst>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CFUN?
Response
+CFUN: <fun>
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
26 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Write Command
AT+CFUN=<fun>[,<rst>]
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
15s, determined by network.
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<fun>
<rst>
0
1
4
0
1
Example
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Minimum functionality
Full functionality (Default)
Disable phone both transmit and receive RF circuits
Do not reset the ME before setting it to <fun> power level
This is default when <rst> is not given
Reset the ME before setting it to <fun> power level
AT+CFUN=0
+CPIN: NOT READY
OK
AT+COPS?
+COPS: 0
OK
AT+CPIN?
+CME ERROR: 13
AT+CFUN=1
OK
+CPIN: SIM PIN
AT+CPIN=1234
+CPIN: READY
//Switch phone to minimum functionality
//No operator is registered
//SIM failure
//Switch phone to full functionality
OK
Call Ready
AT+CPIN?
+CPIN: READY
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
27 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
OK
AT+COPS?
+COPS: 0,0,"CHINA MOBILE"
//Operator is registered
OK
2.20. AT+QPOWD
Power off
AT+QPOWD Power off
Write Command
AT+QPOWD=<n>
Response
When <n>=0
OK
When <n>=1
NORMAL POWER DOWN
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<n>
0
1
Example
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Urgent power off ( Do not send out URC "NORMAL POWER DOWN")
Normal power off (Send out URC "NORMAL POWER DOWN")
AT+QPOWD=0
OK
AT+QPOWD=1
NORMAL POWER DOWN
2.21. AT+CMEE
AT+CMEE
//Urgent power off, returned OK
//Normal power off, send out URC“NORMAL
POWER DOWN”
Report Mobile Equipment Error
Report Mobile Equipment Error
Test Command
AT+CMEE=?
Response
+CMEE: (list of supported <n>s)
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
28 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Read Command
AT+CMEE?
Response
+CMEE: <n>
OK
Write Command
AT+CMEE=[<n>]
Response
TA disables or enables the use of result code +CME ERROR:
<err> as an indication of an error related to the functionality of
the ME.
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<n>
0
1
2
Example
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Disable result code
Enable result code and use numeric values
Enable result code and use verbose values
//Disable result code
AT+CMEE=0
OK
AT+CPIN=1234
ERROR
AT+CMEE=1
OK
AT+CPIN=1234
+CME ERROR: 10
AT+CMEE=2
//Only “ERROR” will be displayed
//Enable error result code with numeric values
//Enable error result code with verbose (string)
values
OK
AT+CPIN=1234
+CME ERROR: SIM not inserted
2.22. AT+CSCS
AT+CSCS
Select TE Character Set
Select TE Character Set
Test Command
AT+CSCS=?
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
+CSCS: (list of supported <chset>s)
Confidential / Released
29 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
OK
Read Command
AT+CSCS?
Response
+CSCS: <chset>
OK
Write Command
AT+CSCS=<chset>
Response
Set character set <chset> which is used by the TE. The TA
can then convert character strings correctly between the TE
and ME character sets.
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<chset>
"GSM"
"HEX"
"IRA"
"PCCP437"
"UCS2"
"8859-1"
Example
AT+CSCS?
+CSCS: "GSM"
300ms
GSM default alphabet
Character strings consist only of hexadecimal numbers from 00 to FF
International reference alphabet
PC character set code
UCS2 alphabet
ISO 8859 Latin 1 character set
OK
AT+CSCS="UCS2"
OK
AT+CSCS?
+CSCS: "UCS2"
//Query the current character set
//Set the character set to “UCS2”
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
30 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
2.23. AT+GCAP Request Complete TA Capabilities List
AT+GCAP Request Complete TA Capabilities List
Test Command
AT+GCAP=?
Response
OK
Execution Command
AT+GCAP
Response
TA reports a list of additional capabilities.
+GCAP: <name>
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Maximum Response Time
Reference
V.25ter
Parameter
<name>
+CGSM
+FCLASS
300ms
GSM function is supported
FAX function is supported
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
31 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
3
Serial Interface Control Commands
3.1. AT&C
Set DCD Function Mode
AT&C
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Set DCD Function Mode
Execution Command
AT&C[<value>]
Response
This parameter determines how the state of circuit 109(DCD)
relates to the detection of received line signal from the distant
end.
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
V.25ter
Parameter
0
1
<value>
3.2. AT&D
AT&D
DCD line is always ON
DCD line is ON only in the presence of data carrier
Set DTR Function Mode
Set DTR Function Mode
Execution Command
AT&D[<value>]
Response
This parameter determines how the TA responds when circuit
108/2(DTR) is changed from the ON to the OFF condition
during data mode.
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
V.25ter
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
32 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Parameter
0
1
2
<value>
TA ignores status on DTR
ON->OFF on DTR: Change to command mode with remaining the connected call
ON->OFF on DTR: Disconnect data call, change to command mode. During state
DTR=OFF auto-answer is off
3.3. AT+ICF Set TE-TA Control Character Framing
AT+ICF
Set TE-TA Control Character Framing
Test Command
AT+ICF=?
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Response
+ICF: (list of supported <format>s), (list of supported
<parity>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+ICF?
Response
+ICF: <format>,<parity>
OK
Write Command
AT+ICF=<format>[,<parity>]]
Response
This parameter setting determines the serial interface
character framing format and parity received by TA from TE.
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
V.25ter
Parameter
<format>
<parity>
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
2
3
8 data 0 parity 2 stop
8 data 1 parity 1 stop
8 data 0 parity 1 stop
7 data 0 parity 2 stop
7 data 1 parity 1 stop
7 data 0 parity 1 stop
Odd
Even
Mark (1)
Space (0)
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
33 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
NOTES
1.
2.
The command is applied for command state.
The <parity> field is ignored if the <format> field specifies no parity.
3.4. AT+IFC
AT+IFC
Set TE-TA Local Data Flow Control
Set TE-TA Local Data Flow Control
Test Command
AT+IFC=?
Response
+IFC: (list of supported <dce_by_dte>s), (list of supported
<dte_by_dce>s)
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
OK
Read Command
AT+IFC?
Response
+IFC: <dce_by_dte>,<dte_by_dce>
OK
Write Command
AT+IFC=<dce_by_dte>,<dte_by_dce>
Response
This parameter setting determines the data flow control on
the serial interface for data mode.
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
V.25ter
Parameter
<dce_by_dte>
<dte_by_dce>
Specifies the method will be used by TE when receiving data from TA
0
None
1
XON/XOFF, do not pass characters on to data stack
2
RTS flow control
3
XON/XOFF, pass characters on to data stack
Specifies the method will be used by TA when receiving data from TE
0
None
1
XON/XOFF
2
CTS flow control
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
34 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
NOTE
This flow control is applied for data mode.
Example
//Open the hardware flow control
AT+IFC=2,2
OK
AT+IFC?
+IFC: 2,2
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
3.5. AT+ILRR
Set TE-TA Local Data Rate Reporting Mode
AT+ILRR Set TE-TA Local Data Rate Reporting Mode
Test Command
AT+ILRR=?
Response
+ILRR: (list of supported <value>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+ILRR?
Response
+ILRR: <value>
OK
Write Command
AT+ILRR=[<value>]
Response
This parameter setting determines whether or not an
intermediate result code of local rate is reported when the
connection is established. The rate is applied after the final
result code of the connection is transmitted to TE.
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
V.25ter
Parameter
<value>
0
1
Disables reporting of local port rate
Enables reporting of local port rate
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
35 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
NOTE
If the <value> is set to 1, the following intermediate result will come out on connection to indicate the port
rate settings.
+ILRR:<rate>
<rate>
Port rate setting on call connection in Baud per second
300
1200
2400
4800
9600
14400
19200
28800
38400
57600
115200
3.6. AT+IPR
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Set TE-TA Fixed Local Rate
AT+IPR Set TE-TA Fixed Local Rate
Test Command
AT+IPR=?
Response
+IPR: (list of supported auto detectable <rate>s),(list of
supported fixed-only<rate>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+IPR?
Response
+IPR: <rate>
OK
Write Command
AT+ IPR=<rate>
Maximum Response Time
Response
This parameter setting determines the data rate of the TA on
the serial interface. After the delivery of any result code
associated with the current command line, the rate of
command takes effect.
OK
300ms
Reference
V.25ter
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
36 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Parameter
<rate>
Baud rate per second
0 (Autobauding)
75
150
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
14400
19200
28800
38400
57600
115200
NOTES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
The default configuration of AT+IPR is adaptive baud enabled (AT+IPR=0).
If a fixed baud rate is set, make sure that both TE (DTE, usually external processor) and TA (DCE,
Quectel GSM module) are configured to the same rate. If adaptive baud is enabled, the TA could
automatically recognize the baud rate currently used by the TE after receiving “AT” or “at” string.
The value of AT+IPR cannot be restored with AT&F and ATZ, but it is still storable with AT&W and
visible in AT&V.
In multiplex mode, the baud rate cannot be changed by the write command AT+IPR=<rate>, and the
setting is invalid and not stored even if AT&W is executed after the write command.
A selected baud rate takes effect after the write commands are executed and acknowledged by “OK”.
Example
AT+IPR=115200
OK
AT&W
//Set fixed baud rate to 115200
//Store current setting, that is, the serial
communication speed is 115200 after restart
module
OK
AT+IPR?
+IPR: 115200
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
37 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
3.6.1. Adaptive Baud
To take advantage of adaptive baud mode, specific attention must be paid to the following requirements:
1.
Adaptive baud synchronization between TE and TA.
 Ensure that TE and TA are correctly synchronized and the baud rate used by the TE is detected
by the TA. To allow the baud rate to be synchronized simply use an “AT” or “at” string. This is
necessary after customer activates adaptive baud or when customer starts up the module with
adaptive baud enabled.
 It is recommended to wait for 2 to 3 seconds before sending the first “AT” or “at” string after the
module is started up with adaptive baud enabled. Otherwise undefined characters might be
returned.
2.
Restriction on adaptive baud operation.
 The serial interface shall be used with 8 data bits, no parity and 1 stop bit (factory setting).
 The command “A/” can’t be used.
 Only the string “AT” or “at” can be detected (either “AT” or “at”).
 URCs that may be issued before the TA detects a new baud rate by receiving the first AT
character, and they will be sent at the previously detected baud rate.
 If TE’s baud rate is changed after TA has recognized the earlier baud rate, loss of
synchronization between TE and TA would be encountered and an “AT” or “at” string must be
re-sent by TE to regain synchronization on baud rate. To avoid undefined characters during
baud rate resynchronization and the possible malfunction of resynchronization, it is not
recommended to switch TE’s baud rate when adaptive baud is enabled. Especially, this
operation is forbidden in data mode.
3.
Adaptive baud and baud rate after restarting.
 In the adaptive baud mode, the detected baud rate is not saved. Therefore, resynchronization is
required after restarting the module.
 Unless the baud rate is determined, an incoming CSD call can’t be accepted. This must be taken
into account when adaptive baud and auto-answer mode (ATS0≠0) are enabled at the same
time, especially if SIM PIN 1 authentication is done automatically and the setting ATS0≠0 is
stored to the user profile with AT&W.
 Until the baud rate is synchronized, URCs after restarting will not be output when adaptive baud
is enabled.
4.
Adaptive baud and multiplex mode.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
If adaptive baud is active it is not recommended to switch to multiplex mode.
5.
Adaptive baud and Windows modem.
 The baud rate used by Windows modem can be detected while setting up a dial-up GPRS/CSD
connection. However, some Windows modem drivers switch TE’s baud rate to default value
automatically after the GPRS call is terminated. In order to prevent no response to the Windows
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
38 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual

modem when it happens, it is not recommended to establish the dial-up GPRS/CSD connection
in adaptive baud mode.
Based on the same considerations, it is also not recommended to establish the FAX connection
in adaptive baud mode for PC FAX application, such as WinFax.
NOTE
To assure reliable communication and avoid any problem caused by undetermined baud rate between
DCE and DTE, it is strongly recommended to configure a fixed baud rate and save it instead of using
adaptive baud after start-up.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
3.7. AT+CMUX
AT+CMUX
Multiplexer Control
Multiplexer Control
Test Command
AT+CMUX=?
Response
+CMUX: (list of supported <mode>s), (<subset>s),
(<port_speed>s),(<N1>s),(<T1>s),(<N2>s),(<T2>s),(<T3>s),
(<k>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CMUX?
Response
+CMUX:<mode>,0,5,127,10,3,30,10,2
OK
ERROR
Write Command
AT+CMUX=[<mode>[,<subset>[,<port
_speed>[,<N1>[,<T1>[,<N2>[,<T2>[,<T
3>[,<k>]]]]]]]]]
Response
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<mode>
<subset>
<port_speed>
Multiplexer transparency mechanism
0
Basic option
The way by which the multiplexer control channel is set up
0
UIH frames used only
Transmission rate
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
39 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
<N1>
<T1>
<N2>
<T2>
<T3>
<k>
NOTES
1.
2.
3.
5
115200bit/s
Maximum frame size
127
Acknowledgement timer in a unit of ten milliseconds
10
Maximum number of re-transmissions
3
Response timer for the multiplexer control channel in a unit of ten milliseconds
30
Wake up response timers in seconds
10
Window size, for Advanced operation with Error Recovery options
2
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Advanced option with Error Recovery options is not supported.
The multiplexing transmission rate is fixed according to the current serial baud rate. It is
recommended to enable multiplexing protocol under 115200 bit/s baud rate.
Multiplexer control channels are listed as follows:
Channel Number
Type
DLCI
None
Multiplexer Control
0
1
07.07 and 07.05
1
2
07.07 and 07.05
2
3
07.07 and 07.05
3
4
07.07 and 07.05
4
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
40 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
4
Status Control Commands
4.1. AT+CEER
Extended Error Report
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
AT+CEER Extended Error Report
Test Command
AT+CEER=?
Response
OK
Execution Command
AT+CEER
Response
TA returns an extended report of the reason for the last call
release.
+CEER: <locationID>,<cause>
OK
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<locationID>
<cause>
Example
AT+CEER
+CEER: 0,0
300ms
Location ID as number code. Location IDs are listed in Section 8.3.1.
Each ID is related with anther table that contains a list of <cause>s.
Reason for last call release as number code. The number codes are listed in
several tables, sorted by different categories. The tables can be found proceeding
from the Location ID given in Section 8.3.1
//Query error reporting in normal state, return “No error”
OK
ATD10086;
OK
AT+CLCC
+CLCC: 1,0,0,0,0,"10086",129,""
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
41 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
OK
//Established a call and the remote party hangs up the call
//Query error reporting, the <locationID>=1 means “Cause
for protocol stack (PS) layer”, <cause>=16 means
“Normal call clearing”
NO CARRIER
AT+CEER
+CEER: 1,16
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
4.2. AT+CPAS
AT+CPAS
Mobile Equipment Activity Status
Mobile Equipment Activity Status
Test Command
AT+CPAS=?
Response
+CPAS: (list of supported <pas>s)
OK
Execution Command
AT+CPAS
Response
TA returns the activity status of ME.
+CPAS: <pas>
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<pas>
0
2
3
4
300ms
Ready
Unknown (ME is not guaranteed to respond to instructions)
Ringing
Call in progress or call hold
Example
AT+CPAS
+CPAS: 0
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
//Module is idle
Confidential / Released
42 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
OK
ATD10086;
OK
AT+CLCC
+CLCC: 1,0,3,0,0,"10086",129,""
OK
AT+CPAS
+CPAS: 3
//Module is incoming call (ringing)
OK
AT+CLCC
+CLCC: 1,0,0,0,0,"10086",129,""
OK
AT+CPAS
+CPAS: 4
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
4.3. AT+QINDRI
//Call in progress
Indicate RI When Using URC
AT+QINDRI Indicate RI When Using URC
Test Command
AT+QINDRI=?
Response
+QINDRI: (list of supported <status>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QINDRI?
Response
+QINDRI: <status>
OK
Write Command
AT+QINDRI=<status>
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
43 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Parameter
<status>
0
1
Off
On
4.4. AT+QMOSTAT
AT+QMOSTAT
Show State of Mobile Originated Call
Show State of Mobile Originated Call
Test Command
AT+QMOSTAT=?
Response
+QMOSTAT: (list of supported <mode>s)
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
OK
Read Command
AT+QMOSTAT?
Response
+QMOSTAT: <mode>
OK
Write Command
AT+QMOSTAT=<mode>
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<mode>
Example
0
1
Do not show call state of mobile originated call
Show call state of mobile originated call. After dialing call numbers, the URC
strings of MO RING will be sent if the other call side is alerted and the URC strings
of MO CONNECTED will be sent if the call is established
AT+QMOSTAT=1
OK
ATD10086;
OK
//Show call state of mobile originated call
MO RING
//The other call side is alerted
MO CONNECTED
//The call is established
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
44 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
4.5. AT+QIURC
Enable or Disable Initial URC Presentation
AT+QIURC Enable or Disable Initial URC Presentation
Test Command
AT+QIURC=?
Response
+QIURC: (list of supported <mode>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QIURC?
Response
+QIURC: <mode>
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Write Command
AT+QIURC=<mode>
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<mode>
NOTE
0
1
Disable URC presentation
Enable URC presentation
When the module powers on and initialization procedure is over. URC "Call Ready" will be presented if
<mode> is 1.
4.6. AT+QEXTUNSOL Enable/Disable Proprietary Unsolicited
Indications
AT+QEXTUNSOL Enable/Disable Proprietary Unsolicited Indications
Test Command
AT+QEXTUNSOL=?
Response
+QEXTUNSOL: (list of supported <extunsol>s)
OK
Write Command
AT+QEXTUNSOL=<exunsol>,<mode>
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
OK
Confidential / Released
45 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<extunsol> String type. Values currently reserved by the present document
"SQ"
Signal Quality Report. Displays signal strength and channel bit error rate (similar
to AT+CSQ) in form +CSQN: <rssi>, <ber>when values change.
"FN"
Forbidden network available only. When returning to a non-registered state, this
indicates whether all the available PLMNs are forbidden.
"MW" SMS Message waiting. On receiving an SMS (as indicated by the +CMTI
indication) the SMS is decoded and checked to see if it contains one or more of
the message waiting indications (i.e. voicemail, email, fax etc.). If so, an
unsolicited indication is shown in the form for each message type:
+QMWT: <store>,<index>,<voice>,<fax>,<email>,<other>. Where <store>
is the message store containing the SM, index is the message index and <voice>,
<email>, <fax>, <other> contain the number of waiting messages (with ‘0’
defined as clear indication, non-zero for one or more waiting messages) or blank
for not specified in this message.
"UR"
Unsolicited result code. Produces an unsolicited indication in the following call
state transition. Multiple notifications may occur for the same transition +QGURC:
<event>. Where <event> describes the current call state:
<event>:
0 Terminated active call, at least one held call remaining
1 Attempt to make an Mobile Originated call
2 Mobile Originated Call has failed for some reason
3 Mobile Originated call is ringing
4 Mobile Terminated call is queued (Call waiting)
5 Mobile Originated Call now has been connected
6 Mobile Originated or Mobile Terminated call has been disconnected
7 Mobile Originated or Mobile Terminated call hung up.
8 Mobile Originated call dialed a non-emergency number in emergency
mode
9 No answer for mobile Originated call
10 Remote number busy for Mobile Originated call
"BC"
Battery Charge. Displays battery connection status and battery charge level
(similar to AT+CBC) in form +CBCN: <bcs>,<bcl> when values change.
"BM"
Band mode. Displays band mode (similar to AT+QBAND) in form +QBAND:
<band> when value changes.
"SM"
Additional SMS Information. Displays additional information about SMS events in
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
46 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
the form of Unsolicited messages of the following format +TSMSINFO: <CMS
error info> where <CMS error info> is a standard CMS error in the format
defined by the AT+CMEE command i.e. either a number or a string.
Call information. Displays the disconnected call ID and the remaining call
numbers after one of the call is disconnected. +CCINFO: <Call id
disconnected>,<Remain calls>
Disable
Enable
Query
"CC"
<mode>
0
1
2
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
4.7. AT+QINISTAT
AT+QINISTAT
Query State of Initialization
Query State of Initialization
Test Command
AT+QINISTAT=?
Response
OK
Execution Command
AT+QINISTAT
Response
+QINISTAT: <state>
OK
Maximum Response Time
Reference
Parameter
<state>
NOTE
0
1
2
3
300ms
No initialization
Ready to execute AT command
Phonebook has finished initialization
SMS has finished initialization
When <state> is 3, it also means initialization of SIM card related functions has finished.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
47 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
4.8. AT+QNSTATUS
Query GSM Network Status
AT+QNSTATUS Query GSM Network Status
Test Command
AT+QNSTATUS=?
Response
OK
Execution Command
AT+QNSTATUS
Response
+QNSTATUS: <status>
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Maximum Response Time
Reference
Parameter
<status>
255
0
1
2
4.9. AT+QNITZ
AT+QNITZ
300ms
Not ready to retrieve network status
Work in normal state
No available cell
Only limited service is available
Network Time Synchronization
Network Time Synchronization
Test Command
AT+QNITZ=?
Response
+QNITZ: (list of supported <enable>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QNITZ?
Response
+QNITZ: <enable>
OK
Write Command
AT+QNITZ=<enable>
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
48 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<enable>
<time>
<ds>
0
Disable to synchronize time from GSM network
1
Enable to synchronize time from GSM network
If the function is enabled, on receiving network time message, an unsolicited indication
is shown in the form: “+QNITZ: <time>,<ds>”
String type value. Format is "yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz,ds", where characters indicate year
(two last digits), month, day, hour, minutes, seconds and time zone (indicates the
difference, expressed in quarters of an hour, between the local time and GMT; range:
-47...+48). E.g. 6th of May 2004, 22:10:00 GMT+2 hours
Daylight Saving Time. It is zero equal to "04/05/06,22:10:00+08,0"
NOTE
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
This function needs support of local GSM network. And the unsolicited also can be read by AT+QLTS
command later.
4.10. AT+QLTS
AT+QLTS
Obtain Latest Network Time Synchronized
Obtain Latest Network Time Synchronized
Test Command
AT+QLTS=?
Execution Command
AT+QLTS
Response
OK
Response
+QLTS: <time>,<ds>
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Execution Command returns latest time for Network
synchronization.
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
49 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Parameter
String type value. Format is "yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz", where characters indicate year (two
last digits), month, day, hour, minutes, seconds and time zone (indicates the difference,
expressed in quarters of an hour, between the local time and GMT; range: -47...+48). E.g.
6th of May 2004, 22:10:00 GMT+2 hours.
Daylight Saving Time. It is zero equals to "04/05/06,22:10:00+08,0"
<time>
<ds>
4.11. AT+QCGTIND
Circuit Switched Call or GPRS PDP Context
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Termination Indication
AT+QCGTIND
Circuit Switched Call or GPRS PDP Context Termination Indication
Test Command
AT+QCGTIND=?
Response
+QCGTIND: (list of supported <n>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QCGTIND?
Response
+QCGTIND: <n>
OK
Write Command
AT+QCGTIND=<n>
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
Parameter
<n>
<type>
300ms
A numeric parameter which indicates whether to enable an unsolicited event code indicating
whether a circuit switched voice call, circuit switched data call or GPRS session has been
terminated
0
Disable
1
Enable
Connection type
0
Circuit switched voice call
1
Circuit switched data call
2
PPP connection
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
50 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
NOTE
When enabled, an unsolicited result code is returned after the connection has been terminated
+QCGTIND: <type>.
Example
ATD10086;
OK
+QCGTIND: 0
NO CARRIER
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
4.12. AT+CTZU
Time
AT+CTZU
//A circuit switched voice call has been terminated
Network Time Synchronization and Update the RTC
Network Time Synchronization and Update the RTC Time
Test Command
AT+CTZU=?
Response
+CTZU: (list of supported <mode>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CTZU?
Response
+CTZU: <mode>
OK
Write Command
AT+CTZU=<mode>
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
300ms
Parameter
<mode>
0
1
2
Disable automatic update RTC time via NITZ.
Update network synchronized time to RTC and save time zone into NVRAM.
Update GMT time with time zone to RTC, save time zone into NVRAM, ignore
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
51 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
daylight saving time.
Update localized time and time zone to RTC, and save time zone into NVRAM.
Same with <mode>=2
3
4
NOTE
This function needs support of local GSM network. After setting the AT+CTZU, the value will be
automatically saved into flash. After the module is restarted, it can also take effect.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
4.13. AT+CTZR
AT+CTZR
Network Time Synchronization Report
Network Time Synchronization Report
Test Command
AT+CTZR=?
Response
+CTZR: (list of supported <mode>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CTZR?
Response
+CTZR: <mode>
OK
Write Command
AT+CTZR=<mode>
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
Parameter
<mode>
0
1
2
300ms
Disable time zone change event reporting
Enable time zone change event reporting by unsolicited result code +CTZV: <tz>
Enable extended time zone reporting by unsolicited result code
+CTZE: <tz>,<dst>,[<time>]
NOTE
This function needs support of local GSM network. After setting the AT+CTZU, the value will be
automatically saved into flash. After the module is restarted, it can take effect.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
52 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
5
SIM Related Commands
5.1. AT+CIMI
Request International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI)
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
AT+CIMI Request International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI)
Test Command
AT+CIMI=?
Execution Command
AT+CIMI
Response
OK
Response
TA returns <IMSI>for identifying the individual SIM which is
attached to ME.
<IMSI>
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<IMSI>
Example
300ms
International Mobile Subscriber Identity (string without double quotes)
AT+CIMI
460023210226023
//Query IMSI number of SIM which is attached to ME
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
53 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
5.2. AT+CLCK
AT+CLCK
Facility Lock
Facility Lock
Test Command
AT+CLCK=?
Response
+CLCK: (list of supported <fac>s)
OK
Write Command
AT+CLCK=<fac>,<mode>,<passwd>[,
<class>]
Response
This command is used to lock, unlock or interrogate a ME or a
network facility <fac>. Password is normally needed to do
such actions. When querying the status of a network service
(<mode>=2) the response line for ‘not active’ case
(<status>=0) should be returned only if service is not active
for any <class>.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
If <mode><>2 and command is successful:
OK
If <mode>=2 and command is successful:
+CLCK: <status>[,<class1>[<CR><LF>
+CLCK: <status>, class2....]]
OK
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<fac>
"PS"
"SC"
"AO"
"OI"
"OX"
"AI"
"IR"
"AB"
5s
PH-SIM (lock Phone to SIM card) (ME asks password when other than current
SIM card inserted; ME may remember certain amount of previously used cards
thus not requiring password when they are inserted)
SIM (lock SIM card) (SIM asks password in ME power-up and when this lock
command is issued)
BAOC (Barr All Outgoing Calls) (refer to GSM02.88[6] clause 1)
BOIC (Barr Outgoing International Calls) (refer to GSM02.88[6] clause 1)
BOIC-exHC (Barr Outgoing International Calls except to Home Country) (refer to
GSM02.88[6] clause 1)
BAIC (Barr All Incoming Calls) (refer to GSM02.88[6] clause 2)
BIC-Roam (Barr Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the home country) (refer
to GSM02.88 [6] clause 2)
All Barring services (refer to GSM02.30[19]) (applicable only for <mode>=0)
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
54 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
"AG"
<mode>
<passwd>
<class>
<status>
Example
All out Going barring services (refer to GSM02.30[19])(applicable only for
<mode>=0)
"AC"
All in Coming barring services (refer to GSM02.30[19])(applicable only for
<mode>=0)
"FD"
SIM fixed dialing memory: If the mobile is locked to "FD", only the phone numbers
stored to the "FD" memory can be dialed
"PF"
Lock Phone to the very first SIM card
"PN"
Network Personalization (refer to GSM 02.22)
"PU"
Network subset Personalization (refer to GSM 02.22)
"PP"
Service Provider Personalization (refer to GSM 02.22)
"PC"
Corporate Personalization (refer to GSM 02.22)
0
Unlock
1
Lock
2
Query status
Password
1
Voice
2
Data
4
FAX
7
All telephony except SMS (Default)
8
Short message service
16
Data circuit sync
32
Data circuit async
0
Off
1
On
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
AT+CLCK="SC", 2
+CLCK: 0
OK
AT+CLCK="SC",1,"1234"
OK
AT+CLCK="SC",2
+CLCK: 1
OK
AT+CLCK="SC",0,"1234"
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
//Query the status of SIM card lock, 0-unlock
//Lock SIM card, the password is 1234
//Query the status of SIM card lock, 1-lock
//Unlock SIM card
Confidential / Released
55 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
5.3. AT+CPIN
Enter PIN
AT+CPIN Enter PIN
Test Command
AT+CPIN=?
Response
OK
Read Command
AT+CPIN?
Response
TA returns an alphanumeric string indicating whether or not
some password is required.
+CPIN: <code>
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Write Command
AT+CPIN=<pin>[,<new pin>]
Response
TA stores a password which is necessary before it can be
operated (SIM PIN, SIM PUK, PH-SIM PIN, etc.). If the PIN is
to be entered twice, the TA shall automatically repeat the PIN.
If no PIN request is pending, no action is taken and an error
message, +CME ERROR, is returned to TE.
If the PIN required is SIM PUK or SIM PUK2, the second pin
is required. This second pin, <new pin>, is used to replace
the old pin in the SIM
OK
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<code>
<pin>
<new pin>
5s
READY
SIM PIN
SIM PUK
PH_SIM PIN
PH_SIM PUK
SIM PIN2
No further entry needed
ME is waiting for SIM PIN
ME is waiting for SIM PUK
ME is waiting for phone to SIM card (antitheft)
ME is waiting for SIM PUK (antitheft)
PIN 2, e.g. it is possible to edit the FDN book only if preceding command
was acknowledged with +CME ERROR:17
SIM PUK2
Possible only if preceding command was acknowledged with error
+CME ERROR: 18
String type; password
String type; If the PIN required is SIM PUK or SIMPUK2: new password
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
56 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Example
AT+CPIN?
+CPIN: SIM PIN
//Query PIN code is locked
OK
AT+CPIN=1234
+CPIN: READY
//PIN
OK
AT+CPIN?
+CPIN: READY
//PIN has already been entered
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
OK
AT+CPIN?
+CPIN: SIM PUK
//Query PUK code is locked
OK
AT+CPIN="26601934","1234"
+CPIN: READY
OK
AT+CPIN?
+CPIN: READY
OK
5.4. AT+CPWD
//Enter PUK and new PIN password
//PUK has already been entered
Change Password
AT+CPWD Change Password
Test Command
AT+CPWD=?
Response
TA returns a list of pairs which present the available facilities
and the maximum length of their password.
+CPWD: (list of supported <fac>s), (<pwdlength>s)
OK
Write Command
AT+CPWD=<fac>,<oldpwd>,<newpwd
>
Response
TA sets a new password for the facility lock function.
OK
Maximum Response Time
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
5s
Confidential / Released
57 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
Phone locked to SIM (device code). The "PS" password may either be individually
specified by the client or, depending on the subscription, supplied from the
provider (e.g. with a prepaid mobile)
"SC"
SIM (lock SIM card) (SIM asks password in ME power-up and when this lock
Command issued)
"AO"
BAOC (Barr All Outgoing Calls) (refer to GSM02.88[6] clause 1)
"OI"
BOIC (Barr Outgoing International Calls) (refer to GSM02.88[6] clause 1)
"OX"
BOIC-exHC (Barr Outgoing International Calls except to Home Country) (refer to
GSM02.88[6] clause 1)
"AI"
BAIC (Barr All Incoming Calls) (refer to GSM02.88[6] clause 2)
"IR"
BIC-Roam (Barr Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the home country) (refer
to GSM02.88 [6] clause 2)
"AB"
All Barring services (refer to GSM02.30[19]) (applicable only for <mode>=0)
"AG"
All outgoing barring services (refer to GSM02.30[19]) (applicable only for
<mode>=0
"AC"
All incoming barring services (refer to GSM02.30[19]) (applicable only for
<mode>=0)
"FD"
SIM fixed dialing memory feature
"P2"
SIM PIN2
<pwdlength>Integer. Max length of password
<oldpwd>
Password specified for the facility from the user interface or with command
<newpwd> New password
<fac>
"PS"
Example
AT+CPIN?
+CPIN: READY
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
OK
AT+CPWD="SC","1234","4321"
OK
AT+CPIN?
//Change SIM card password to “4321”
//Restart module or re-activate the SIM card, query PIN
code is locked
+CPIN: SIM PIN
OK
AT+CPIN="4321"
+CPIN: READY
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
//PIN must be entered to define a new password “4321”
Confidential / Released
58 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
OK
5.5. AT+CRSM
Restricted SIM Access
AT+CRSM Restricted SIM Access
Test Command
AT+CRSM=?
Response
OK
Write Command
AT+CRSM=<Command>[,<fileId>[,<P
1>,<P2>,<P3>[,<data>]]]
Response
+CRSM: <sw1>, <sw2> [,<response>]
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
OK
ERROR
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
300ms
176
READ BINARY
178
READ RECORD
192
GET RESPONSE
214
UPDATE BINARY
220
UPDATE RECORD
242
STATUS
All other values are reserved; refer to GSM 11.11
<fileId>
Integer type; this is the identifier for an elementary data file on SIM. Mandatory for
every Command except STATUS
<P1>,<P2>,<P3> Integer type; parameters passed on by the ME to the SIM. These parameters are
mandatory for every command, except GET RESPONSE and STATUS. The values
are described in GSM 11.11
<data>
Information which shall be written to the SIM (hexadecimal character format)
<sw1>,<sw2>
Integer type; information from the SIM about the execution of the actual command.
These parameters are delivered to the TE in both cases, on successful or failed
execution of the command
<response>
Response of a successful completion of the command previously issued (hexadecimal
character format). STATUS and GET RESPONSE return data, which gives information
about the current elementary data field. This information includes the type of file and its
size (refer to GSM 11.11). After READ BINARY or READ RECORD command the
requested data will be returned. The parameter is not returned after a successful
UPDATE BINARY or UPDATE RECORD command
<Command>
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
59 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Example
AT+CRSM=242
+CRSM: 145, 211, "000000007F100200000000000A13000C0400838A808A"
//<sw1>=145,<sw2>=211,"000000007F100200000000000
A13000C0400838A808A" which is the command
previously return data, refer to GSM 11.11
OK
5.6. AT+QCSPWD
Change PS Super Password
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
AT+QCSPWD Change PS Super Password
Test Command
AT+QCSPWD=?
Response
OK
Write Command
AT+QCSPWD=<oldpwd>,<newpwd>
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<oldpwd>
<newpwd>
NOTES
1.
2.
String type. Old password and length should be 8
String type. New password and length should be 8
Default value of <oldpwd> is "12345678".
If the module is locked to a specific SIM card through +CLCK and password lost or SIM state is
PH-SIM PUK, you can use the super password to unlock it.
5.7. AT+QCCID
Show CCID
AT+QCCID Show CCID
Test Command
AT+QCCID=?
Response
OK
Execution Command
AT+QCCID
Response
ccid data
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
60 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Example
AT+QCCID
898600220909A0206023
OK
//Query CCID of the SIM card
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
5.8. AT+QGID
Get SIM Card Group Identifier
AT+QGID Get SIM Card Group Identifier
Execution Command
AT+QGID
Response
+QGID: <gid1> <gid2>
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
Reference
Parameter
<gid1>
<gid2>
NOTE
300ms
Integer type of SIM card group identifier 1
Integer type of SIM card group identifier 2
If the SIM supports GID files, the GID values are retuned. Otherwise 0xff is retuned.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
61 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
5.9. AT+QSIMVOL Select SIM Card Operating Voltage
AT+QSIMVOL Select SIM Card Operating Voltage
Test Command
AT+QSIMVOL=?
Response
+QSIMVOL: (list of supported <mode>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QSIMVOL?
Response
+QSIMVOL: <mode>
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Write Command
AT+QSIMVOL=<mode>
Response
OK
ERROR
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<mode>
NOTE
0
1
2
Recognize 1.8V and 3.0V SIM card (Default)
Recognize 1.8V SIM card only
Recognize 3.0V SIM card only
AT+QSIMVOL can take effect only when the command is set successfully and the module is restarted.
5.10. AT+QSPN
Get Service Provider Name from SIM
AT+QSPN Get Service Provider Name from SIM
Read Command
AT+QSPN?
Response
+QSPN: (<spn>s), (list of supported <display mode>s)
OK
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
300ms
Confidential / Released
62 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Reference
Parameter
<spn>
<display mode>
String type; service provider name on SIM
0
Do not display PLMN. Already registered on PLMN
1
Display PLMN
NOTE
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
CME errors are possible if SIM is not inserted or PIN is not entered.
5.11. AT+QTRPIN
AT+QTRPIN
Times Remain to Input SIM PIN/PUK
Times Remain to Input SIM PIN/PUK
Execution Command
AT+QTRPIN
Response
Times remain to input SIM PIN.
+QTRPIN: <chv1>,<chv2>,<puk1>,<puk2>
OK
Maximum Response Time
Reference
Parameter
<chv1>
<chv2>
<puk1>
<puk2>
300ms
Times remain to input chv1
Times remain to input chv2
Times remain to input puk1
Times remain to input puk2
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
63 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
6
Network Service Commands
6.1. AT+COPS
AT+COPS
Operator Selection
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Operator Selection
Test Command
AT+COPS=?
Response
TA returns a list of quadruplets, each representing an
operator present in the network. Any of the formats may be
unavailable and should then be an empty field. The list of
operators shall be in order: home network, networks
referenced in SIM and other networks.
+COPS: (list of supported<stat>, long alphanumeric <oper>,
short alphanumeric <oper>, numeric <oper>s)[,,(list of
supported <mode>s),(list of supported <format>s)]
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Read Command
AT+COPS?
Response
TA returns the current mode and the currently selected
operator. If no operator is selected, <format> and <oper> are
omitted.
+COPS: <mode>[,<format>[,<oper>]]
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Write Command
AT+COPS=<mode>[,<format>[,<oper
>]]
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
TA forces an attempt to select and register the GSM network
operator. If the selected operator is not available, no other
operator shall be selected (except <mode>=4). The format of
selected operator name shall apply to further read commands
(+COPS?).
Confidential / Released
64 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
75s, determined by network.
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<stat>
<oper>
<mode>
<format>
Example
0
Unknown
1
Operator available
2
Operator current
3
Operator forbidden
Operator in format as per <mode>
0
Automatic mode; <oper> field is ignored
1
Manual operator selection; <oper> field shall be present
2
Manual deregister from network
3
Set only <format> (for read Command +COPS?) – not shown in Read Command
response
4
Manual/automatic selected; if manual selection fails, automatic mode
(<mode>=0) is entered
0
Long format alphanumeric <oper>;can be up to 16 characters long
1
Short format alphanumeric <oper>
2
Numeric <oper>; GSM Location Area Identification number
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
AT+COPS=?
//List all current network operators
+COPS: (2,"CHINA MOBILE","CMCC","46000"),(3,"CHINA UNICOM GSM","UNICOM","46001")
,,(0-4),(0-2)
OK
AT+COPS?
+COPS: 0,0,"CHINA MOBILE"
//Query the currently selected network operator
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
65 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
6.2. AT+CREG
AT+CREG
Network Registration
Network Registration
Test Command
AT+CREG=?
Response
+CREG: (list of supported <n>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CREG?
Response
TA returns the status of result code presentation and an
integer <stat> which shows whether the network has
currently indicated the registration of the ME. Location
information elements <lac> and <ci> are returned only when
<n>=2 and ME is registered in the network.
+CREG: <n>,<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Write Command
AT+CREG=<n>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<n>
<stat>
<lac>
<ci>
Response
TA controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code
+CREG: <stat> when <n>=1 and there is a change in the ME
network registration status.
OK
300ms
0
Disable network registration unsolicited result code
1
Enable network registration unsolicited result code +CREG: <stat>
2
Enable network registration unsolicited result code with location information
0
Not registered, ME is not currently searching a new operator to register to
1
Registered, home network
2
Not registered, but ME is currently searching a new operator to register to
3
Registration denied
4
Unknown
5
Registered, roaming
String type; two byte location area code in hexadecimal format
String type; two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
66 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
NOTE
Unsolicited result code
If <n>=1 and there is a change in the ME network registration status +CREG: <stat>
If <n>=2 and there is a change in the ME network registration status or a change of the network cell:
+CREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]
Example
AT+CREG=1
OK
+CREG: 1
AT+CREG=2
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
//URC reports that operator has been found
//Activates extended URC mode
+CREG: 1,"1878","0873"
6.3. AT+CSQ
AT+CSQ
//URC reports that operator has been found with location
area code and cell ID
Signal Quality Report
Signal Quality Report
Test Command
AT+CSQ=?
Response
+CSQ: (list of supported <rssi>s),(list of supported <ber>s)
OK
Execution Command
AT+CSQ
Response
+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>
OK
+CME ERROR: <err>
Execution Command returns received signal strength
indication <rssi> and channel bit error rate <ber> from the
ME. Test Command returns values supported by the TA.
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
67 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Parameter
<rssi>
<ber>
0
-113 dBm or less
1
-111 dBm
2...30 -109... -53 dBm
31
-51 dBm or greater
99
Not known or not detectable
(in percent):
0...7
As RXQUAL values in the table in GSM 05.08 subclause 8.2.4
99
Not known or not detectable
Example
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
AT+CSQ=?
+CSQ: (0-31,99),(0-7,99)
OK
AT+CSQ
+CSQ: 28,0
OK
//Query the current signal strength indication is 28 and
the bit error rate is 0
6.4. AT+CPOL Preferred Operator List
AT+CPOL Preferred Operator List
Test Command
AT+CPOL=?
Response
+CPOL: (list of supported <index>s),(list of supported
<format>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CPOL?
Response
+CPOL: <index1>,<format>,<oper1>
[<CR><LF>+CPOL: <index2>,<format>,<oper2>
[…]]
OK
+CME ERROR: <err>
Write Command
AT+CPOL=<index>[,<format>[,<oper>
]]
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
OK
Confidential / Released
68 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<index>
<format>
<oper>
I
Integer type: order number of operator in SIM preferred operator list
0
Long format alphanumeric <oper>
1
Short format alphanumeric <oper>
2
Numeric <oper>
String type: <format> indicates either alphanumeric or numeric format is used (see +COPS
command)
NOTE
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
There is SIM card not allowed to edit the list of the preferred operators.
6.5. AT+COPN
Read Operator Names
AT+COPN Read Operator Names
Test Command
AT+COPN=?
Execution Command
AT+COPN
Response
OK
Response
+COPN: <numeric1>,<alpha1 >
[<CR><LF>+COPN: <numeric2>,<alpha2>
[…]]
OK
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
69 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Parameter
<numericn>
<alphan>
String type: operator in numeric format (see +COPS)
String type: operator in long alphanumeric format (see +COPS)
6.6. AT+QBAND
Get and Set Mobile Operation Band
AT+QBAND Get and Set Mobile Operation Band
Test Command
AT+QBAND=?
Response
+QBAND: (list of supported <op_band>s)
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
OK
Read Command
AT+QBAND?
Response
+QBAND: <op_band>
OK
Write Command
AT+QBAND=<op_band>
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
Parameter
<op_band>
30s, determined by network.
"EGSM_MODE"
"DCS_MODE"
"PCS_MODE"
"GSM850_MODE"
"EGSM_DCS_MODE"
"GSM850_PCS_MODE"
"GSM850_EGSM_DCS_PCS_MODE”
NOTE
The following radio setting to be updated is stored in non-volatile memory.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
70 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
6.7. AT+QENG
Switch on or off Engineering Mode
AT+QENG Switch on or off Engineering Mode
Test Command
AT+QENG=?
Response
+QENG: (list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported
<dump>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QENG?
Response
The corresponding information
according to <dump>.
+QENG: <mode>,<dump>
is
reported
selectively
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
URCs of the serving cell information:
+QENG:
0,<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<cellid>,<bcch>,<bsic>,<dbm>,<c1
>,<c2>,<txp>,<rla>,<tch>,<ts>,<maio>,<hsn><ta>,<rxq_s
ub>,<rxq_full>
URCs of 1-6 the neighboring cell information:
[+QENG:1,list of (<ncell>,<bcch>,<dbm>,<bsic>,<c1>,
<c2>,<mcc>, <mnc>,<lac>,<cellid>)…]
URCs of cell frequency list(CA) of the serving cell:
[+QENG: 2,list of (<arfcn>)…]
BA measured result list:
[+QENG: 4,record number of the list, list of
(<bcch>,<dbm>,<bsic>)]
OK
Write Command
AT+QENG=<mode>[,< dump>]
Response
OK
ERROR
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
71 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Parameter
Switch off engineering mode
Switch on engineering mode
Switch on engineering mode, and activate the URC report of network information
<dump>
Only display the serving cell information
Display the serving cell information, 1-6 neighboring cells information
Display the serving cell information and list of serving cell carrier list
Display the serving cell information,1-6 neighboring cell information and list of
serving cell carrier list
4
Display the serving cell information,1-6 neighboring cell information, list of serving
cell carrier list and BA measured resulte list.
<mcc>
Mobile country code
<mnc>
Mobile network code
<lac>
Location area code in hex format
<cellid>
Cell ID in hex format
<bcch>
Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number of Broadcast Control Channel BCCH
<bsic>
Base station identity code
<dbm>
Receive signal level in dBm unit
<c1>
C1 value
<c2>
C2 value
<txp>
Maximum TX power level when accessing on a CCH
<rla>
Minimum receiving level permitted to access the system
<ts>
TimeSlots
<maio>
MAIO value
<hsn>
HSN value
<tch>
ARFCN of TCH, ‘h’ figure hopping
<ta>
Timing Advance,range 0~63
<rxq_sub> RX quality(sub), range 0-7
<rxq_full> RX quality(full), range 0-7
<ncell>
Number of neighboring six cell ID 1~6
<arfcn>
Absolute radio frequency channel number
<mode>
NOTES
0
1
2
0
1
2
3
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
The following radio setting to be updated is stored in non-volatile memory.
1. When mode is 2, auto URCs are reported per 5 seconds.
2. The <lac> and <cellid> parameters in hex format, the parameter is in decimal.
3. If the cell information is not detected, the parameter is replaced by ‘x’ char.
4. If the detecting is not expert mode, the <tch>, <ts>, <maio>, <hsn>, <ta>, <rxq_sub> and
<rxq_full> parameter do not display the value of the parameter and replaced by ‘x’ char.
5. During the network connecting, if the hopping frequency is supported by the network, so the channel
of TCH is instable. Using the ’h’ figure <tch> under this mode.
6. Under expert mode, when the <c1> and <c2> of the serving cell cannot be updated. Using the ‘-1’
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
72 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
figure to display the illegal value. At the same time，the <txp> and <rla> parameter cannot be
updated in a certain condition, all the same holding the value of idle mode. This is because ME
cannot be updated in this mode, ME cannot update the selection of cell and reselection of the
parameter. When the connecting is over, mobile device goes back idle mode and gives out the
correct value.
7. If TA can report the information of the neighboring cell, the URCs of six neighboring cell should be
reported. If some cells cannot be measured, the ‘x’ char will be filled in the parameter of these cells.
8. Under the special mode, the <c1> and <c2> parameters of the neighboring cell may be measured,
then will report an unmeaning value. When the <mcc>, <mnc> ,<lac> and <cellid> parameter of the
neighboring cell cannot be measured, the 'x' char will be filled in these parameters of all the six cells.
9. The command does not report the RX level and the RX quality. The “AT+CSQ” command can be
used to query the values of RX level and RX quality.
10. The “AT+QSPCH” command can be used to re-query the type of the voice channel duration calling
(FR, HR, EFR, AMR_FR, AMR_HR).
11. The BA measured list max record numbers are 32. If any of the BCCH cannot get the BSIC value, the
BSIC will show ‘x’ instead. The measured list is only including the measured BCCH in the BA list, not
the whole BA list.
Example
Idle mode:
AT+QENG=2
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
+QENG: 0,460,00,1806,2602,64,46,-72,119,119,5,8,x,x,x,x,x,x,x
Dedicated mode:
AT+QENG=2,3
OK
+QENG: 0,460,00,1806,2031,17,41,-73,-1,-1,5,8,h,7,0,24,1,0,1
+QENG:
1,1,17,-74,41,111,95,460,00,1806,2031,2,2,-74,45,110,94,460,00,1878,151,3,22,-77,40,100,84,460,00,1
806,2012,4,24,-77,45,97,81,460,00,1806,2013,5,25,-81,40,83,67,460,00,1806,2032,6,532,-92,48,-1,-1,x
,x,x,x
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
73 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
6.8. AT+QSCANF
Scan Power of GSM Frequency
AT+QSCANF Scan Power of GSM Frequency
Test Command
AT+QSCANF=?
Response
+QSCANF: (list of supported <band>s),(list of supported
<freq>s)
OK
Write Command
AT+QSCANF=<band>,<freq>
Response
If <freq>=9999 and command is successful:
+QSCANF:
1, CH113, -63.5
2, CH80, -64.2
4, CH22, -64.5
…..
20, CH116, -74.2
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
If <freq> is fixed frequency and command is successful:
+QSCANF:
CH<freq>, <dbm>
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
Parameter
<band>
<freq>
<dbm>
300ms
0
BAND 900
1
BAND 1800
2
BAND 1900
3
BAND 850
9999 Scan all frequency in specified band
0-1023 Scan a fixed frequency in specified band
The signal strength indication in dbm value for a specified frequency
NOTE
Before using this AT command, RF function of system MUST be disabled. Please make sure CFUN state
is 0 or 4. About how to change CFUN state, please refer to AT command AT+CFUN.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
74 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
6.9. AT+QLOCKF
AT+QLOCKF
Lock GSM Frequency
Lock GSM Frequency
Test Command
AT+QLOCKF=?
Response
+QLOCKF: (list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported
<band1900>s), (list of supported <arfcn>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QLOCKF?
Response
+QLOCKF: <status>
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
OK
Write Command
AT+QLOCKF=<mode>,<band1900>,<
arfcn1>[,<arfcn2>[,<arfcn3>]]
Response
OK
ERROR
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<mode>
<band1900>
<arfcn>
<status>
0
1
2
0
1
2
0-1024
0
1
Disable lock frequency
Enable lock frequency
Enable lock frequency and auto switch to saved frequency after powered on
Not a cell ID of 1900 band
Cell ID of 1900 band
Auto distinguish whether is a cell ID of 1900 band
ARFCN information
ME has not locked a certain ARFCN
ME has locked a certain ARFCN
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
75 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
7
Call Related Commands
7.1. ATA Answer an Incoming Call
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
ATA Answer an Incoming Call
Execution Command
ATA
Response
TA sends off-hook to the remote station.
Response in case of voice call, if successfully connected:
OK
Response if no connection:
NO CARRIER
Maximum Response Time
Reference
V.25ter
NOTES
1.
2.
3.
1s, determined by network.
Any additional commands on the same command line are ignored.
This command may be aborted generally by receiving a character during execution. The aborting is
not possible during some states of connection establishment such as handshaking.
See also ATX.
Example
RING
AT+CLCC
+CLCC: 1,1,4,0,0,"02154450290",129,""
OK
ATA
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
//A voice call is ringing
//Accept the voice call with ATA
Confidential / Released
76 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
7.2. ATD Mobile Originated Call to Dial a Number
ATD
Mobile Originated Call to Dial a Number
Execution Command
ATD<n>[<mgsm>][;]
Response
This command can be used to set up outgoing voice, data or
FAX calls. It also serves to control supplementary services.
If no dial tone and (parameter setting ATX2 or ATX4):
NO DIALTONE
If busy and (parameter setting ATX3 or ATX4):
BUSY
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
If a connection cannot be established:
NO CARRIER
If connection is successful and voice call:
OK
Maximum Response Time
Reference
V.25ter
Parameter
<n>
1s, determined by network.
String of dialing digits and optionally V.25ter modifiers
dialingdigits:0-9, * , #, +, A, B, C
Following V.25ter modifiers are ignored:
,(comma), T, P, !, W, @
Emergency call:
<n>
Standardized emergency number 112(no SIM needed)
<mgsm>
String of GSM modifiers:
I
Actives CLIR (Disables presentation of own number to called party)
i
Deactivates CLIR (Enable presentation of own number to called party)
G
Activates closed user group invocation for this call only
g
Deactivates closed user group invocation for this call only
<;>
Only required to set up voice call, return to command state
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
77 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
NOTES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
This command may be aborted generally by receiving an ATH command or a character during
execution. The aborting is not possible during some states of connection establishment such as
handshaking.
Parameter "I" and "i" only if no *# code is within the dial string.
<n> is default value for last number that can be dialed by ATDL.
*# codes sent with ATD are treated as voice calls. Therefore, the command must be terminated with
a semicolon ";".
See ATX command for setting result code and call monitoring parameters.
Responses returned after dialing with ATD
 For voice call two different responses mode can be determined. TA returns “OK” immediately
either after dialing was completed or after the call was established. The setting is controlled by
AT+COLP. Factory default is AT+COLP=0, which causes the TA returns “OK” immediately after
dialing was completed, otherwise TA will returns “OK”, “BUSY”, “NO DIAL TONE”, “NO
CARRIER”.
Using ATD during an active voice call:
 When a user originates a second voice call while there is already an active voice call, the first
call will be automatically put on hold.
 The current states of all calls can be easily checked at any time by using the AT+CLCC
command.
Example
ATD10086;
OK
7.3. ATH
ATH
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
//Dialing out the party’s number
Disconnect Existing Connection
Disconnect Existing Connection
Execution Command
ATH[n]
Response
Disconnect existing call by local TE from command line and
terminate call.
OK
Maximum Response Time
90s, determined by network.
Reference
V.25ter
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
78 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Parameter
0
<n>
Disconnect from line and terminate call
NOTE
OK is issued after circuit 109 (DCD) is turned off, if it was previously on.
7.4. +++
+++
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Switch from Data Mode to Command Mode
Switch from Data Mode to Command Mode
Execution Command
+++
Response
This command is only available during TA is in data mode,
such as, a GPRS connection and a transparent TCPIP
connection. The “+++” character sequence causes the TA to
cancel the data flow over the AT interface and switch to
command mode. This allows you to enter AT command while
maintaining the data connection with the remote server or,
accordingly, the GPRS connection.
OK
Maximum Response Time
Reference
V.25ter
NOTES
1.
2.
300ms
To prevent the “+++” escape sequence from being misinterpreted as data, it should comply to
following sequence:
 No characters entered for T1 time (0.5 seconds).
 “+++” characters entered with no characters in between. For PPP online mode, the interval
between two “+” MUST should be less than 1 second and for a transparent TCPIP connection,
the interval MUST be less than 20ms.
 No characters entered for T1 time (0.5 seconds).
 Switch to command mode, otherwise go to step 1.
To return from command mode back to data or PPP online mode: Enter ATO
 Another way to change to command mode is through DTR, see AT&D command for the details.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
79 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
7.5. ATO
ATO
Switch from Command Mode to Data Mode
Switch from Command Mode to Data Mode
Execution Command
ATO[n]
Response
TA resumes the connection and switches back from
command mode to data mode.
If connection is not successfully resumed:
NO CARRIER
else
TA returns to data mode from command mode CONNECT
<text>
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Maximum Response Time
Reference
V.25ter
Parameter
<n>
NOTE
0
300ms
Switch from command mode to data mode
TA returns to data mode from command mode CONNECT <text>,<text> only if parameter setting is X>0.
7.6. ATP Select Pulse Dialing
ATP Select Pulse Dialing
Execution Command
ATP
Response
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
V.25ter
NOTE
No effect in GSM.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
80 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
7.7. ATS0
ATS0
Set Number of Rings before Automatically Answering Call
Set Number of Rings before Automatically Answering Call
Read Command
ATS0?
Response
<n>
OK
Write Command
ATS0=<n>
Response
This parameter setting determines the number of rings before
auto-answer.
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Maximum Response Time
Reference
V.25ter
Parameter
0
1-255
<n>
NOTE
300ms
Automatic answering is disabled
Enable automatic answering on the ring number specified
If <n> is set too high, the calling party may hang up before the call can be answered automatically.
Example
//Set three rings before automatically answering a call
ATS0=3
OK
//Call coming
RING
RING
RING
//Automatically answering the call after three rings
7.8. ATS6
ATS6
Set Pause before Blind Dialing
Set Pause before Blind Dialing
Read Command
ATS6?
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
<n>
Confidential / Released
81 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
OK
Write Command
ATS6=<n>
Response
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
V.25ter
Parameter
<n>
0-2-10
NOTE
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Number of seconds to wait before blind dialing
No effect in GSM.
7.9. ATS7
ATS7
Set Number of Seconds to Wait for Connection Completion
Set Number of Seconds to Wait for Connection Completion
Read Command
ATS7?
Response
<n>
OK
Write Command
ATS7=<n>
Response
This parameter setting determines the amount of time to wait
for the connection completion in case of answering or
originating a call.
OK
Maximum Response Time
Reference
V.25ter
300ms
Parameter
<n>
1-60-255
Number of seconds to wait for connection completion
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
82 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
NOTES
1.
2.
3.
If called party has specified a high value for ATS0=<n>, call setup may fail.
The correlation between ATS7 and ATS0 is important, for example: Call may fail if ATS7=30 and
ATS0=20.
ATS7 is only applicable to data call.
7.10. ATS8
ATS8
Set the Number of Seconds to Wait for Comma Dial Modifier
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Set the Number of Seconds to Wait for Comma Dial Modifier
Read Command
ATS8?
Response
<n>
OK
Write Command
ATS8=<n>
Response
OK
Maximum Response Time
Reference
V.25ter
Parameter
0
1-2-255
<n>
NOTE
300ms
No pause when comma encountered in dial string
Number of seconds to wait
No effect in GSM.
7.11. ATS10
Set Disconnect Delay after Indicating the Absence of Data
Carrier
ATS10
Set Disconnect Delay after Indicating the Absence of Data Carrier
Read Command
ATS10?
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
<n>
Confidential / Released
83 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
OK
Write Command
ATS10=<n>
Response
This parameter setting determines the amount of time that the
TA will remain connected in absence of data carrier. If the
data carrier is once more detected before disconnection, the
TA remains connected.
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
V.25ter
Parameter
7.12. ATT
ATT
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
1-15-254
<n>
Number of delay in 100ms
Select Tone Dialing
Select Tone Dialing
Execution Command
ATT
Response
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
V.25ter
NOTE
No effect in GSM.
7.13. AT+CSTA Select Type of Address
AT+CSTA Select Type of Address
Test Command
AT+CSTA=?
Response
+CSTA: (list of supported <type>s)
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
84 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Read Command
AT+CSTA?
Response
+CSTA: <type>
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<type>
Current address type setting.
129
Unknown type (IDSN format number)
145
International number type (ISDN format )
161
National number type (IDSN format)
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
7.14. AT+CLCC
AT+CLCC
List Current Calls of ME
List Current Calls of ME
Test Command
AT+CLCC=?
Execution Command
AT+CLCC
Response
OK
Response
TA returns a list of current calls of ME. If command succeeds
but no calls are available, no information response is sent to
TE.
[+CLCC: <id1>,<dir>,<stat>,<mode>,<mpty>[,
<number>,<type>[,""]]
[<CR><LF>+CLCC: <id2>,<dir>,<stat>,<mode>,<mpty>[,
<number>,<type>[,""]]
[...]]]
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
85 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Parameter
<idx>
<dir>
<stat>
<mode>
<mpty>
<number>
<type>
Integer type; call identification number as described in GSM 02.30 sub clause 4.5.5.1; this
number can be used in +CHLD Command operations
0
Mobile originated (MO) call
1
Mobile terminated (MT) call
State of the call
0
Active
1
Held
2
Dialing (MO call)
3
Alerting (MO call)
4
Incoming (MT call)
5
Waiting (MT call)
Bearer/tele service
0
Voice
1
Data
2
FAX
9
Unknown
0
Call is not one of multiparty (conference) call parties
1
Call is one of multiparty (conference) call parties
Phone number in string type in format specified by <type>
Type of address of octet in integer format
129
Unknown type(IDSN format number)
145
International number type (ISDN format )
Example
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
AT+CLCC
+CLCC: 1,0,0,0,0,"10086",129,""
OK
7.15. AT+CR
//List the current call of ME
Service Reporting Control
AT+CR Service Reporting Control
Test Command
AT+CR=?
Response
+CR: (list of supported <mode>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CR?
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
+CR: <mode>
Confidential / Released
86 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
OK
Write Command
AT+CR=[<mode>]
Response
TA controls whether or not intermediate result code +CR:
<serv> is returned from the TA to the TE when a call set up.
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<mode>
<serv>
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
0
1
ASYNC
SYNC
REL ASYNC
REL SYNC
NOTE
Disable
Enable
Asynchronous transparent
Synchronous transparent
Asynchronous non-transparent
Synchronous non-transparent
Intermediate result code:
If it is enabled, an intermediate result code is transmitted at the point during connect negotiation at which
the TA has determined which speed and quality of service will be used, before any error control or data
compression reports are transmitted, and before any final result code (e.g. CONNECT) is transmitted.
7.16. AT+CRC
Set Cellular Result Codes for Incoming Call Indication
AT+CRC Set Cellular Result Codes for Incoming Call Indication
Test Command
AT+CRC=?
Response
+CRC: (list of supported <mode>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CRC?
Response
+CRC: <mode>
OK
Write Command
AT+CRC=[<mode>]
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
TA controls whether or not the extended format of incoming
call indication is used.
Confidential / Released
87 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<mode>
NOTE
0
1
Disable extended format
Enable extended format
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Unsolicited result code:
When it is enabled, an incoming call is indicated to the TE with unsolicited result code +CRING: <type>
instead of the normal RING.
Parameter
<type>
ASYNC
Asynchronous transparent
SYNC
Synchronous transparent
REL ASYNC
Asynchronous non-transparent
REL SYNC
Synchronous non-transparent
FAX
Facsimile
VOICE
Voice
Example
AT+CRC=1
OK
//Enable extended format
+CRING: VOICE
ATH
OK
AT+CRC=0
OK
//Indicate incoming call to the TE
RING
ATH
OK
//Indicate incoming call to the TE
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
//Disable extended format
Confidential / Released
88 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
7.17. AT+CRLP Select Radio Link Protocol Parameter
AT+CRLP Select Radio Link Protocol Parameter
Test Command
AT+CRLP=?
Response
TA returns values supported. RLP (Radio Link Protocol)
versions 0 and 1 share the same parameter set. TA returns
only one line for this set (where <verx> is not present).
+CRLP: (list of supported <iws>s),(list of supported
<mws>s),(list of supported <T1>s),(list of supported
<N2>s),(list of supported <ver1>s),(list of supported <T4>s)
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
OK
Read Command
AT+CRLP?
Response
TA returns current settings for RLP version. RLP versions 0
and 1 share the same parameter set. TA returns only one line
for this set (where <verx> is not present).
+CRLP: <iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N2>,<ver1>,<T4>
OK
Write Command
AT+CRLP=[<iws>[,<mws>[,<T1>[,<N2
>[,<ver>[,<T4>]]]]]]
Response
TA sets radio link protocol (RLP) parameters used when
non-transparent data calls are set up.
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<iws>
<mws>
<T1>
<N2>
<verx>
0-61
0-61
39-255
1-255
RLP
<T4>
3-255
Interworking window size (IWF to MS)
Mobile window size (MS to IWF)
Acknowledgment timer T1 in a unit of 10ms
Retransmission attempts N2
RLP version number in integer format. When version indication is not present,
it shall equal 0.
Re-sequencing period in integer format, in a unit of 10ms
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
89 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
7.18. AT+CSNS
AT+CSNS
Single Numbering Scheme
Single Numbering Scheme
Test Command
AT+CSNS=?
Response
+CSNS: (list of supported <mode>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CSNS?
Response
+CSNS: <mode>
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Write Command
AT+CSNS=[<mode>]
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<mode>
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Voice
Alternating voice/FAX, voice first
FAX
Alternating voice/data, voice first
Data
Alternating voice/FAX, FAX first
Alternating voice/data, data first
Voice followed by data
7.19. AT+CMOD
Configure Alternating Mode Calls
AT+CMOD Configure Alternating Mode Calls
Test Command
AT+CMOD=?
Response
+CMOD: (list of supported <mode>s)
OK
Write Command
AT+CMOD=[<mode>]
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
OK
ERROR
Confidential / Released
90 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<mode>
0
1
2
3
Single mode
Alternating voice/FAX
Alternating voice/data
Voice followed by data
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
7.20. AT+QSFR
Preference Speech Coding
AT+QSFR Preference Speech Coding
Test Command
AT+QSFR=?
Response
+QSFR: (list of supported <mode>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QSFR?
Response
+QSFR: <mode>
OK
Write Command
AT+QSFR=<mode>
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<mode>
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Automatic mode
FR
HR
EFR
AMR_FR
AMR_HR
FR and EFR, FR priority
EFR and FR, EFR priority
EFR and HR, EFR priority
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
91 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
EFR and AMR_FR, EFR priority
AMR_FR and FR, AMR_FR priority
AMR_FR and HR, AMR_FR priority
AMR_FR and EFR, AMR_FR priority
AMR_HR and FR, AMR_HR priority
AMR_HR and HR, AMR_HR priority
AMR_HR and EFR, AMR_HR priority
NOTE
This setting is stored in the non-volatile memory and will be used whenever the module is powered up
again.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
7.21. AT+QSPCH
Speech Channel Type Report
AT+QSPCH Speech Channel Type Report
Test Command
AT+QSPCH=?
Response
+QSPCH: (list of supported <mode>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QSPCH?
Response
+QSPCH: <mode>,<speech channel>
OK
Write Command
AT+QSPCH=<mode>
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<mode>
<speech channel>
0
Disable report speech channel type
1
Enable report speech channel type
Speech channel type
0
NO SPEECH TCH
1
FR
2
HR
3
EFR
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
92 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
4
5
AMR_FR
AMR_HR
NOTE
URC +QSPCH: <mode>,<speech channel> will be indicated when speech channel type changes.
7.22. AT+QDISH
AT+QDISH
Disable ATH
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Disable ATH
Test Command
AT+QDISH=?
Response
+QDISH: (list of supported <disableath>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QDISH?
Response
+QDISH: <disableath>
OK
Write Command
AT+QDISH=<disableath>
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
Parameter
<disableath>
300ms
Disable ATH
0
Enable ATH command
1
Disable ATH command
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
93 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
8
SMS Commands
8.1. AT+CSMS
AT+CSMS
Select Message Service
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Select Message Service
Test Command
AT+CSMS=?
Response
+CSMS: (list of supported <service>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CSMS?
Response
+CSMS: <service>,<mt>,<mo>,<bm>
OK
Write Command
AT+CSMS=<service>
Response
+CSMS: <mt>,<mo>,<bm>
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.05
Parameter
<service>
<mt>
<mo>
0
300ms
GSM 03.40 and 03.41 (the syntax of SMS AT commands is compatible with GSM
07.05 Phase 2 version 4.7.0; Phase 2+ features which do not require new
command syntax may be supported (e.g. correct routing of messages with new
Phase 2+ data coding schemes))
128
SMS PDU mode - TPDU only used for ending/receiving SMSs
Mobile Terminated Messages
0
Type not supported
1
Type supported
Mobile Originated Messages
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
94 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
<bm>
0
Type not supported
1
Type supported
Broadcast Type Messages
0
Type not supported
1
Type supported
8.2. AT+CMGF Select SMS Message Format
AT+CMGF
Select SMS Message Format
Test Command
AT+CMGF=?
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Response
+CMGF: (list of supported <mode>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CMGF?
Response
+CMGF: <mode>
OK
Write Command
AT+CMGF=[<mode>]
Response
TA sets parameter to denote which kind of I/O format of
messages is used.
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.05
Parameter
<mode>
0
1
PDU mode
Text mode
8.3. AT+CSCA SMS Service Center Address
AT+CSCA SMS Service Center Address
Test Command
AT+CSCA=?
Response
OK
Read Command
AT+CSCA?
Response
+CSCA: <sca>,<tosca>
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
95 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
OK
Write Command
AT+CSCA=<sca>[,<tosca>]
Response
TA updates the SMSC address, through which mobile
originated SMS are transmitted. In text mode, setting is used
by sending and writing commands. In PDU mode, setting is
used by the same commands, but only when the length of the
SMSC address coded into <pdu> parameter equals zero.
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.05
Parameter
<sca>
<tosca>
NOTE
300ms
GSM 04.11 RP SC address Address-Value field in string format; BCD numbers (or GSM
default alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the currently selected TE
character set (specified by +CSCS in TS 07.07); type of address given by <tosca>
Service center address format GSM 04.11 RP SC address Type-of-Address octet in integer
format (default refer to <toda>)
The Command writes the parameters in NON-VOLATILE memory.
Example
AT+CSCA="+8613800210500",145
OK
AT+CSCA?
+CSCA: "+8613800210500",145
//SMS service center address
//Query SMS service center address
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
96 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
8.4. AT+CPMS
AT+CPMS
Preferred SMS Message Storage
Preferred SMS Message Storage
Test Command
AT+CPMS=?
Response
+CPMS: (list of supported <mem1>s),(list of supported
<mem2>s),(list of supported <mem3>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CPMS?
Response
+CPMS:
<mem1>,<used1>,<total1>,<mem2>,<used2>,<total2>,<m
em3>,<used3>,<total3>
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
OK
Write Command
AT+CPMS=<mem1>[,<mem2>[,<mem
3>]]
Response
TA selects memory storages <mem1>, <mem2> and
<mem3> to be used for reading, writing, etc.
+CPMS:
<used1>,<total1>,<used2>,<total2>,<used3>,<total3>
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.05
Parameter
<mem1>
<mem2>
<mem3>
300ms
Messages to be read and deleted from this memory storage
"SM"
SIM message storage
"ME"
Mobile Equipment message storage
"MT"
Sum of "SM" and "ME" storages
Messages will be written and sent to this memory storage
"SM"
SIM message storage
"ME"
Mobile Equipment message storage
"MT"
Sum of "SM" and "ME" storages
Received messages will be placed in this memory storage
if routing to PC is not set ("+CNMI")
"SM"
SIM message storage
"ME"
Mobile Equipment message storage
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
97 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
<usedx>
<totalx>
"MT"
Sum of "SM" and "ME" storages
Integer type; Number of messages currently in <memx>
Integer type; Number of messages storable in <memx>
NOTE
The message storages of SIM and ME offer maximum space for 60, the SIM message storage will be
priority stored. The SIM storage offer maximum space for 50, the ME storage offer maximum space for
10.
Example
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
AT+CPMS="SM","SM","SM"
+CPMS: 0,50,0,50,0,50
OK
AT+CPMS?
+CPMS: "SM",0,50,"SM",0,50,"SM",0,50
OK
8.5. AT+CMGD
AT+CMGD
Test Command
AT+CMGD=?
//Set SMS message storage as “SM”
//Query the current SMS message storage
Delete SMS Message
Delete SMS Message
Response
+CMGD: (list of supported <index>s),(list of supported
<delflag>s)
OK
Write Command
AT+CMGD=<index>[,<delflag>]
Response
TA deletes message from preferred message storage
<mem1> location <index>.
OK
ERROR
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR:<err>
Maximum Response Time
300ms.
Note: Operation of <delflag> depends on the storage of
deleted messages.
Reference
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
98 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
GSM 07.05
Parameter
<index>
<delflag>
Integer type; value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory
0
Delete message specified in <index>
1
Delete all read messages from <mem1> storage, leaving unread messages and
stored mobile originated messages (whether sent or not) untouched
2
Delete all read messages from <mem1> storage and sent mobile originated
messages, leaving unread messages and unsent mobile originated messages
untouched
3
Delete all read messages from <mem1> storage, sent and unsent mobile
originated messages, leaving unread messages untouched
4
Delete all messages from <mem1> storage
Example
AT+CMGD=1
OK
AT+CMGD=1,4
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
//Delete message specified in <index>=1
//Delete all messages from <mem1> storage
8.6. AT+CMGL List SMS Messages from Preferred Store
AT+CMGL List SMS Messages from Preferred Store
Test Command
AT+CMGL=?
Response
+CMGL: (list of supported <stat>s)
OK
Write Command
AT+CMGL=<stat>[,<mode>]
Response
TA returns messages with status value <stat> from message
storage <mem1> to the TE. If status of the message is
'received unread', status in the storage changes to 'received
read'.
1) If text mode (+CMGF=1) and command successful:
for SMS-SUBMITs and/or SMS-DELIVERs:
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,<oa/da>,[<alpha>],[<scts>][,<tooa/toda>,<
length>]<CR><LF><data>[<CR><LF>
+CMGL:
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
99 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
<index>,<stat>,<da/oa>,[<alpha>],[<scts>][,<tooa/toda>,<
length>]<CR><LF><data>[...]]
for SMS-STATUS-REPORTs:
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st
>[<CR><LF>
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st
>[...]]
for SMS-COMMANDs:
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<fo>,<ct>[<CR><LF>
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<fo>,<ct>[...]]
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
for CBM storage:
+CMGL:<index>,<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,<page>,<pages><CR
><LF><data>[<CR><LF>
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,<page>,<pages><CR><LF><d
ata>[...]]
OK
2) If PDU mode (+CMGF=0) and Command successful:
+CMGL:<index>,<stat>,[<alpha>],<length><CR><LF><pd
u><CR><LF>
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,[alpha],<length><CR><LF><pdu>[...]]
OK
3) If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.05
300ms.
Note: Operation of <stat> depends on the storage of listed
messages.
Parameter
<stat>
1) If text mode
"REC UNREAD" Received unread messages
"REC READ"
Received read messages
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
100 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
<mode>
<alpha>
<da>
<data>
<length>
<index>
<oa>
"STO UNSENT" Stored unsent messages
"STO SENT"
Stored sent messages
"ALL"
All messages
2) If PDU mode
0
Received unread messages
1
Received read messages
2
Stored unsent messages
3
Stored sent messages
4
All messages
0
Normal (default)
1
Not change status of the specified SMS record
String type alphanumeric representation of <da> or <oa> corresponding to the entry found
in MT phonebook; implementation of this feature is manufacturer specific; used character
set should be the one selected with command select TE character set +CSCS (see
definition of this command in TS 07.07)
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Address-Value field in string format; BCD numbers (or
GSM default alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the currently selected TE
character set (refer to command +CSCS in TS 07.07); type of address given by <toda>
In the case of SMS: GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data in text mode responses; format
− if <dcs> indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used and <fo> indicates that
GSM 03.40 TPUser-Data-Header-Indication is not set
− if TE character set other than "HEX" (refer to Command Select TE character set
+CSCS in TS 07.07):ME/TA converts GSM alphabet into current TE character set
according to rules of Annex A
− if TE character set is "HEX": ME/TA converts each 7-bit character of GSM alphabet into
two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. character P (GSM 23) is presented
as 17 (IRA 49 and 55))
− if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used, or <fo> indicates
that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is set: ME/TA converts each 8-bit
octet into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42
is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))
In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 CBM Content of Message in text mode responses; format:
− if <dcs> indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used
− if TE character set other than "HEX" (refer to Command +CSCS in GSM 07.07): ME/TA
converts GSM alphabet into current TE character set according to rules of Annex A
− if TE character set is "HEX": ME/TA converts each 7-bit character of GSM alphabet
into two IRA character long hexadecimal number
− if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used: ME/TA converts
each 8-bit octet into two IRA character long hexadecimal number
Integer type value indicating in the text mode (+CMGF=1) the length of the message body
<data> (or <cdata>) in characters; or in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual
TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length)
Integer type; value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory
GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Address-Value field in string format; BCD numbers (or
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
101 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
<pdu>
<scts>
<toda>
<tooa>
GSM default alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the currently selected TE
character set (refer to command +CSCS in TS 07.07); type of address given by <tooa>
In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal
format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal
number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50
and 65)). In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format
GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Center-Time-Stamp in time-string format (refer to <dt>)
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination-Address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (when first
character of <da> is + (IRA 43) default value is 145, otherwise default value is 129)
GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (refer to
<toda>)
NOTE
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
If parameter is omitted the command returns the list of SMS with “REC UNREAD” status.
Example
AT+CMGF=1
OK
AT+CMGL="ALL"
+CMGL: 1,"STO UNSENT","","",
This is a test from Quectel
//Set SMS message format as text mode
//List all messages from message storage
+CMGL: 2,"STO UNSENT","","",
This is a test from Quectel,once again.
OK
8.7. AT+CMGR
AT+CMGR
Test Command
AT+CMGR=?
Read SMS Message
Read SMS Message
Write Command
AT+CMGR=<index>[,<mode>]
Response
OK
Response
TA returns SMS message with location value <index> from
message storage <mem1> to the TE. If status of the
message is 'received unread', status in the storage changes
to 'received read'.
1) If text mode (+CMGF=1) and command is executed
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
102 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
successfully:
for SMS-DELIVER:
+CMGR:
<stat>,<oa>,[<alpha>],<scts>[,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<
sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data>
for SMS-SUBMIT:
+CMGR:
<stat>,<da>,[<alpha>][,<toda>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,[<vp>],<
sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data>
for SMS-STATUS-REPORTs:
+CMGR:
<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
for SMS-COMMANDs:
+CMGR:
<stat>,<fo>,<ct>[,<pid>,[<mn>],[<da>],[<toda>],<length><
CR><LF><cdata>]
for CBM storage:
+CMGR:
<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages><CR><LF><dat
a>
2) If PDU mode (+CMGF=0) and command successful:
+CMGR: <stat>,[<alpha>],<length><CR><LF><pdu>
OK
3) If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.05
Depends on the length of message content.
Parameter
<index>
<mode>
<alpha>
Integer type; value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory
0
Normal
1
Not change the status of the specified SMS record
String type alphanumeric representation of <da> or <oa> corresponding to the entry found
in MT phonebook; implementation of this feature is manufacturer specific
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
103 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
<da>
<data>
<dcs>
<fo>
<length>
<mid>
<oa>
<pdu>
<pid>
<sca>
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Address-Value field in string format; BCD numbers (or
GSM default alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the currently selected TE
character set (specified by +CSCS in TS 07.07); type of address given by <toda>
In the case of SMS: GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data in text mode responses; format
− if <dcs> indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used and <fo> indicates that
GSM 03.40 TPUser-Data-Header-Indication is not set
− if TE character set other than "HEX" (refer to command select TE character set
+CSCS in TS 07.07):ME/TA converts GSM alphabet into current TE character set
according to rules of Annex A
− if TE character set is "HEX": ME/TA converts each 7-bit character of GSM alphabet
into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. character P (GSM 23) is
presented as 17 (IRA 49 and 55))
− if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used, or <fo> indicates
that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is set: ME/TA converts each 8-bit
octet into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42
is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 CBM Content of Message in text mode responses; format
− if <dcs> indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used
− if TE character set other than "HEX" (refer to command +CSCS in GSM 07.07): ME/TA
converts GSM alphabet into current TE character set according to rules of Annex A
− if TE character set is "HEX": ME/TA converts each 7-bit character of GSM alphabet
into two IRA character long hexadecimal number
− if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used: ME/TA converts
each 8-bit octet into two IRA character long hexadecimal number
Depending on the command or result code: GSM 03.38 SMS Data Coding Scheme
(default value is 0), or Cell Broadcast Data Coding Scheme in integer format
Depending on the command or result code: first octet of GSM 03.40 SMS-DELIVER,
SMS-SUBMIT (default value is 17), SMS-STATUS-REPORT, or SMS-COMMAND (default
value is 2) in integer format
Integer type value indicating in the text mode (+CMGF=1) the length of the message body
<data> (or <cdata>) in characters; or in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual
TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length)
GSM 03.41 CBM Message Identifier in integer format
GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Address-Value field in string format; BCD numbers (or
GSM default alphabet characters) are converted characters of the currently selected TE
character set (specified by +CSCS in TS 07.07); type of address given by <tooa>
In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal
format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal
number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50
and 65))
In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format
GSM 03.40 TP-Protocol-Identifier in integer format (default value is 0)
GSM 04.11 RP SC address Address-Value field in string format; BCD numbers (or GSM
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
104 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
<scts>
<stat>
<toda>
<tooa>
<tosca>
<vp>
default alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the currently selected TE
character set (specified by +CSCS in TS 07.07); type of address given by <tosca>
GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string format (refer to <dt>)
PDU mode text mode
Explanation
0
"REC UNREAD" Received unread messages
1
"REC READ"
Received read messages
2
"STO UNSENT" Stored unsent messages
3
"STO SENT"
Stored sent messages
4
"ALL"
All messages
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination-Address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (when first
character of <da> is + (IRA 43) default value is 145, otherwise default is 129)
GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (default refer
to <toda>)
GSM 04.11 RP SC address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (default refer to
<toda>)
Depending on SMS-SUBMIT <fo> setting: GSM 03.40 TP-Validity-Period either in integer
format (default value is 167) or in time-string format (refer to <dt>)
Example
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
//Indicates that new message has been received and saved
to <index>=3 of “SM”
AT+CMGR=3
//Read message
+CMGR: "REC UNREAD","+8615021012496","","2010/09/25 15:06:37+32",145,4,0,241,"+8
613800210500",145,27
This is a test from Quectel
+CMTI: "SM",3
OK
8.8. AT+CMGS
AT+CMGS
Send SMS Message
Send SMS Message
Test Command
AT+CMGS=?
Write Command
1) If text mode (+CMGF=1):
AT+CMGS=<da>[,<toda>]<CR>
text is entered
<ctrl-Z/ESC>
ESC quits without sending
2) If PDU mode (+CMGF=0):
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
OK
Response
TA sends message from a TE to the network (SMS-SUBMIT).
Message reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on
successful message delivery. Optionally (when +CSMS
<service> value is 1 and network supports) <scts> is
returned. Values can be used to identify message upon
unsolicited delivery status report result code.
1) If text mode (+CMGF=1) and sent successfully:
Confidential / Released
105 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
AT+CMGS=<length><CR>
PDU is given <ctrl-Z/ESC>
+CMGS: <mr>
OK
2) If PDU mode (+CMGF=0) and sent successfully:
+CMGS: <mr>
OK
3) If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.05
Parameter
<da>
<toda>
<length>
<mr>
Example
120s, determined by network.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Address-Value field in string format; BCD numbers (or
GSM default alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the currently selected TE
character set (specified by +CSCS in TS 07.07); type of address given by <toda>
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination-Address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (when first
character of <da> is + (IRA 43) default value is 145, otherwise default value is 129)
Integer type value indicating in the text mode (+CMGF=1) the length of the message body
<data> (or <cdata>) in characters; or in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual
TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length)
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format
AT+CMGF=1
OK
AT+CSCS="GSM"
OK
AT+CMGS="15021012496"
> This is a test from Quectel
//Set SMS message format as text mode
//Set character set as GSM which is used by the TE
//Enter in text, <CTRL+Z> send message,<ESC> quits
without sending
+CMGS: 247
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
106 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
8.9. AT+CMGW
AT+CMGW
Write SMS Message to Memory
Write SMS Message to Memory
Test Command
AT+CMGW=?
Response
OK
Write Command
1) If text mode (+CMGF=1):
AT+CMGW[=<oa/da>[,<tooa/toda>[,<s
tat>]]]
<CR> text is entered
<ctrl-Z/ESC>
<ESC> quits without sending
Response
TA transmits SMS message (either SMS-DELIVER or
SMS-SUBMIT) from TE to memory storage <mem2>.
Memory location <index> of the stored message is returned.
By default message status will be set to 'stored unsent', but
parameter <stat> also allows other status values to be given.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
2) If PDU mode (+CMGF=0):
AT+CMGW=<length>[,<stat>]<CR>
PDU is given <ctrl-Z/ESC>
If writing is successful:
+CMGW: <index>
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.05
Parameter
<oa>
<da>
<tooa>
<toda>
<stat>
300ms
GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Address-Value field in string format; BCD numbers (or
GSM default alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the currently selected TE
character set (specified by +CSCS in TS 07.07);type of address given by <tooa>
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Address-Value field in string format; BCD numbers (or
GSM default alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the currently selected TE
character set (specified by +CSCS in TS 07.07); type of address given by <toda>
GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (default refer
to <toda>)
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination-Address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (when first
character of <da> is + (IRA 43) default value is 145, otherwise default value is 129)
129 Unknown type (IDSN format number)
145 International number type (ISDN format )
PDU mode text mode
Explanation
0
"REC UNREAD" Received unread messages
1
"REC READ"
Received read messages
2
"STO UNSENT" Stored unsent messages
3
"STO SENT"
Stored sent messages
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
107 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
<length>
<pdu>
<index>
4
"ALL"
All messages
Integer type value indicating in the text mode (+CMGF=1) the length of the message body
<data> (or <cdata>) in characters; or in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual
TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length)
In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal
format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal
number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50
and 65))
In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format
Index of message in selected storage <mem2>
Example
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
AT+CMGF=1
OK
AT+CSCS="GSM"
OK
AT+CMGW="15021012496"
> This is a test from Quectel
+CMGW: 4
OK
8.10. AT+CMSS
AT+CMSS
//Set SMS message format as text mode
//Set character set as GSM which is used by the TE
//Enter in text, <CTRL+Z> write message, <ESC> quits
without sending
Send SMS Message from Storage
Send SMS Message from Storage
Test Command
AT+CMSS=?
Write Command
AT+CMSS=<index>[,<da>[,<toda>]]
Response
OK
Response
TA sends message with location value <index> from
message storage <mem2> to the network (SMS-SUBMIT). If
new recipient address <da> is given, it shall be used instead
of the one stored with the message. Reference value <mr> is
returned to the TE on successful message delivery. Values
can be used to identify message upon unsolicited delivery
status report result code.
1) If text mode (+CMGF=1) and sent successfully:
+CMSS: <mr> [,<scts>]
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
108 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
2) If PDU mode(+CMGF=0) and sent successfully;
+CMSS: <mr> [,<ackpdu>]
OK
3) If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
120s, determined by network.
Reference
GSM 07.05
Parameter
<index>
<da>
<toda>
<mr>
<scts>
<ackpdu>
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Integer type; value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Address-Value field in string format; BCD numbers (or
GSM default alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the currently selected TE
character set (specified by +CSCS in TS 07.07); type of address given by <toda>
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination-Address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (when first
character of <da> is + (IRA 43) default value is 145, otherwise default value is 129)
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format
GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string format (refer to <dt>)
In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal
format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal
number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50
and 65)). In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format
8.11. AT+CMGC
AT+CMGC
Test Command
AT+CMGC=?
Send SMS Command
Send SMS Command
Write Command
1) If text mode (+CMGF=1):
AT+CMGC=<fo>[,<ct>,<pid>,<mn>,<d
a>,<toda>]<CR>
text is entered
<ctrl-Z/ESC>
ESC quits without sending
Response
OK
Response
TA transmits SMS command message from a TE to the
network (SMS-COMMAND). Message reference value <mr>
is returned to the TE on successful message delivery. Value
can be used to identify message upon unsolicited delivery
status report result code.
1) If text mode(+CMGF=1) and sent successfully:
+CMGC: <mr> [,<scts>]
2) If PDU mode (+CMGF=0):
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
109 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
AT+CMGC=<length><CR>
PDU is given <ctrl-Z/ESC>
OK
2) If PDU mode(+CMGF=0) and sent successfully:
+CMGC: <mr> [,<ackpdu>]
OK
3) If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.05
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Parameter
<fo>
<ct>
<pid>
<mn>
<da>
<toda>
<length>
<mr>
<scts>
<ackpdu>
First octet of GSM 03.40 SMS-COMMAND (default value is 2) in integer format
GSM 03.40 TP-Command-Type in integer format (default value is 0)
GSM 03.40 TP-Protocol-Identifier in integer format (default value is 0)
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Number in integer format
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Address-Value field in string format; BCD numbers (or
GSM default alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the currently selected TE
character set (specified by +CSCS in TS 07.07); type of address given by <toda>
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination-Address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (when first
character of <da> is + (IRA 43) default value is 145, otherwise default value is 129)
129 Unknown type(IDSN format number)
145 International number type(ISDN format )
Integer type value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data
unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length)
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format
GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string format (refer to <dt>)
In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal
format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal
number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50
and 65)). In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format
8.12. AT+CNMI
AT+CNMI
300ms
New SMS Message Indications
New SMS Message Indications
Test Command
AT+CNMI=?
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
+CNMI: (list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported
<mt>s),(list of supported <bm>s),(list of supported
Confidential / Released
110 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
<ds>s),(list of supported <bfr>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CNMI?
Response
+CNMI: <mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>,<bfr>
OK
Write Command
AT+CNMI=[<mode>[,<mt>[,<bm>[,<ds
>[,<bfr>]]]]]
Response
TA selects the procedure on how the received new messages
from the network are indicated to the TE when TE is active,
e.g. DTR signal is ON. If TE is inactive (e.g. DTR signal is
OFF), receiving message should be done as specified in
GSM 03.38.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.05
Parameter
<mode>
<mt>
0
300ms
Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA. If TA result code buffer is full, indications
can be buffered in some other place or the oldest indications may be discarded
and replaced with the new received indications
1
Discard indication and reject new received message unsolicited result codes
when TA-TE link is reserved (e.g. in on-line data mode). Otherwise forward them
directly to the TE
2
Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA when TA-TE link is reserved (e.g. in
on-line data mode) and flush them to the TE after reservation. Otherwise forward
them directly to the TE
3
Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE. TA-TE link specific inband
technique used to embed result codes and data when TA is in on-line data mode
(The rules for storing received SMS depend on its data coding scheme (refer to GSM 03.38
[2]), preferred memory storage (+CPMS) setting and this value):
0
No SMS-DELIVER indications are routed to the TE
1
If SMS-DELIVER is stored into ME/TA, indication of the memory location is routed
to the TE by using unsolicited result code: +CMTI: <mem>,<index>
2
SMS-DELIVERs (except class 2) are routed directly to the TE using unsolicited
result code: +CMT: [<alpha>],<length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode enabled)
or +CMT: <oa>, [<alpha>],<scts>
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
111 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
<bm>
<ds>
<bfr>
[,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data>
(Text mode enabled; about parameters in italics, refer to Command Show Text
Mode Parameters +CSDH). Class 2 messages result in indication as defined in
<mt>=1
3
Class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly to TE by using unsolicited result
codes defined in <mt>=2. Messages of other classes result in indication as
defined in <mt>=1
(The rules for storing received CBMs depend on its data coding scheme (refer to GSM
03.38 [2]), the setting of Select CBM Types (+CSCB) and this value):
0
No CBM indications are routed to the TE
2
New CBMs are routed directly to the TE by using unsolicited result code: +CBM:
<length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode enabled) or +CBM:
<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages><CR><LF><data> (Text mode enabled)
3
Class 3 CBMs are routed directly to TE by using unsolicited result codes defined
in <bm>=2. If CBM storage is supported, messages of other classes result in
indication as defined in <bm>=1
0
No SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE
1
SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE by using unsolicited result code:
+CDS: <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode enabled) or +CDS:
<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st> (Text mode enabled)
0
TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined in this command is flushed to the TE
when <mode> 1...3 is entered (OK response shall be given before flushing the
codes)
1
TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is cleared when
<mode>1…3 is entered
NOTE
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Unsolicited result code
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>
+CMT: [<alpha>],<length><CR><LF><pdu>
+CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu>
Example
AT+CMGF=1
OK
AT+CSCS="GSM"
OK
AT+CNMI=2,1
Indicates that new message has been received
Short message is output directly
Cell broadcast message is output directly
//Set SMS message format as text mode
//Set character set as GSM which is used by the TE
//SMS-DELIVER is stored into ME/TA, indication of the
memory location is routed to the TE
OK
+CMTI: "SM",5
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
//Indicate that new message has been received
Confidential / Released
112 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
//Set SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly to the TE
AT+CNMI=2,2
OK
+CMT: "+8615021012496"," ","2010/09/25 17:25:01+32",145,4,0,241,"+8613800210500",145,27
This is a test from Quectel
//Short message is output directly
8.13. AT+CRES
AT+CRES
Restore SMS Settings
Restore SMS Settings
Test Command
AT+CRES=?
Response
+CRES: (list of supported <profile>s)
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
OK
Write Command
AT+CRES[=<profile>]
Response
TA restores SMS settings from non-volatile memory to active
memory. A TA can contain several profiles of settings.
Settings specified in commands service centre address
+CSCA, set message parameters +CSMP and select cell
broadcast message types +CSCB (if implemented) are
restored. Certain settings may not be supported by the
storage (e.g. SIM SMS parameters) and therefore cannot be
restored.
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.05
Parameter
<profile>
0-3
300ms
Manufacturer specific profile number where settings are to be stored
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
113 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
8.14. AT+CSAS
AT+CSAS
Save SMS Settings
Save SMS Settings
Test Command
AT+CSAS=?
Response
+CSAS: (list of supported <profile>s)
OK
Write Command
AT+CSAS[=<profile>]
Response
TA saves active message service settings to non-volatile
memory. A TA can contain several profiles of settings.
Settings specified in commands service centre address
+CSCA, Set Message Parameters +CSMP and Select cell
broadcast message Types +CSCB (if implemented) are
saved. Certain settings may not be supported by the storage
(e.g. SIM SMS parameters) and therefore cannot be saved.
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
If error is related to ME functionality:
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.05
Parameter
<profile>
0-3
8.15. AT+CSCB
300ms
Manufacturer specific profile number where settings are to be stored
Select Cell Broadcast SMS Messages
AT+CSCB Select Cell Broadcast SMS Messages
Test Command
AT+CSCB=?
Response
+CSCB: (list of supported <mode>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CSCB?
Response
+CSCB: <mode>,<mids>,<dcss>
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
114 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Write Command
AT+CSCB=<mode>[,mids>[,<dcss>]]
Response
TA selects which types of CBMs are to be received by the ME.
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.05
Parameter
<mode>
<mids>
<dcss>
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
0
Message types specified in <mids> and <dcss> are accepted
1
Message types specified in <mids> and <dcss> are not accepted
String type; all different possible combinations of CBM message identifiers (refer to <mid>)
(default is empty string)
e.g. "0,1,5,320-478,922"
String type; all different possible combinations of CBM data coding schemes (refer to
<dcs>) (default is empty string)
e.g. "0-3,5"
NOTE
The Command writes the parameters in NON-VOLATILE memory.
8.16. AT+CSDH
Show SMS Text Mode Parameters
AT+CSDH Show SMS Text Mode Parameters
Test Command
AT+CSDH=?
Response
+CSDH: (list of supported <show>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CSDH?
Response
+CSDH: <show>
OK
Write Command
AT+CSDH=[<show>]
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
TA determines whether detailed header information is shown
in text mode result codes.
Confidential / Released
115 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.05
Parameter
<show>
0
1
Example
Do not show header values defined in commands +CSCA and +CSMP (<sca>,
<tosca>, <fo>, <vp>, <pid> and <dcs>) nor <length>, <toda> or <tooa> in
+CMT, +CMGL, +CMGR result codes for SMS-DELIVERs and SMS-SUBMITs in
text mode
Show the values in result codes
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
AT+CSDH=0
OK
AT+CMGR=3
+CMGR: "REC READ","+8615021012496","","2010/09/25 15:06:37+32"
This is a test from Quectel
OK
AT+CSDH=1
OK
AT+CMGR=3
+CMGR: "REC READ","+8615021012496", ,"2010/09/25 15:06:37+32",145,4,0,241,"+861
3800210500",145,27
This is a test from Quectel
OK
8.17. AT+CSMP Set SMS Text Mode Parameters
AT+CSMP Set SMS Text Mode Parameters
Test Command
AT+CSMP=?
Response
+CSMP: (list of supported <fo>s), (list of supported <vp>s),
(list of supported <pid>s), (list of supported <dcs>s)
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
116 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Read Command
AT+CSMP?
Response
+CSMP: <fo>,<vp>,<pid>,<dcs>
OK
Write Command
AT+CSMP=[<fo>[,<vp>[,<pid>[,<dcs>]
]]]
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.05
Parameter
Response
TA selects values for additional parameters needed when SM
is sent to the network or placed in a storage when text mode
is selected (+CMGF=1). It is possible to set the validity period
starting from when the SM is received by the SMSC (<vp> is
in range 0... 255) or define the absolute time of the validity
period termination (<vp> is a string).
OK
300ms
Depending on the Command or result code: first octet of GSM 03.40 SMS-DELIVER,
SMS-SUBMIT (default value is 17), SMS-STATUS-REPORT, or SMS-COMMAND (default
value is 2) in integer format. SMS status report is supported under text mode if <fo> is set
to 49
Depending on SMS-SUBMIT <fo> setting: GSM 03.40 TP-Validity-Period either in integer
format (default 167) or in time-string format (refer to <dt>)
GSM 03.40 TP-Protocol-Identifier in integer format (default value is 0)
GSM 03.38 SMS Data Coding Scheme in Integer format
<fo>
<vp>
<pid>
<dcs>
NOTE
The Command writes the parameters in NON-VOLATILE memory.
8.18. AT+QCLASS0
Store Class 0 SMS to SIM when Receiving Class 0
SMS
AT+QCLASS0
Store Class 0 SMS to SIM when Receiving Class 0 SMS
Test Command
AT+QCLASS0=?
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
+QCLASS0: (list of supported <mode>s)
Confidential / Released
117 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
OK
Read Command
AT+QCLASS0?
Response
+QCLASS0: <mode>
OK
Write Command
AT+QCLASS0=<mode>
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<mode>
Example
0
1
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Disable to store Class 0 SMS when receiving Class 0 SMS
Enable to store Class 0 SMS when receiving Class 0 SMS
For example message in text mode:
AT+CPMS?
+CPMS: "SM",6,50,"SM",6,50,"SM",6,50
OK
AT+QCLASS0=0
OK
//Disable to store SMS when receiving Class 0 SMS
+CMT: "+8615021012496",,"2010/09/26 09:55:37+32"
TEST1 from Quectel
//Short message is output directly
AT+QCLASS0=1
//Enable to store SMS when receiving Class 0 SMS
OK
+CMTI: "SM",7
//Indicate that new message has been received
AT+CMGR=7
+CMGR: "REC UNREAD","+8615021012496","","2010/09/26 09:56:17+32"
TEST2 from Quectel
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
118 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
8.19. AT+QMGDA Delete all SMS
AT+QMGDA Delete all SMS
Test Command
AT+QMGDA=?
Response
+QMGDA: (listed of supported <type>s)
OK
Write Command
AT+QMGDA=<type>
Response
OK
ERROR
+CME ERROR: <err>
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Maximum Response Time
Reference
Parameter
<type>
1) If text mode:
"DEL READ"
"DEL UNREAD"
"DEL SENT"
"DEL UNSENT"
"DEL INBOX"
"DEL ALL"
2) If PDU mode:
1
2
3
4
5
6
Depends on the storage of deleted messages.
Delete all read messages
Delete all unread messages
Delete all sent SMS
Delete all unsent SMS
Delete all received SMS
Delete all SMS
Delete all read messages
Delete all unread messages
Delete all sent SMS
Delete all unsent SMS
Delete all received SMS
Delete all SMS
8.20. AT+QSMSCODE Configure SMS Code Mode
AT+QSMSCODE Configure SMS Code Mode
Test Command
AT+QSMSCODE=?
Response
+QSMSCODE: (list of supported <mode>s)
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
119 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Read Command
AT+QSMSCODE?
Response
+QSMSCODE: <mode>
OK
Write Command
AT+QSMSCODE=<mode>
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<mode>
0
1
2
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Code mode according with NOKIA
Code mode according with SIEMENS
Code mode according with NOKIA, and hexadecimal 0x11 treated as ”_”
hexadecimal 0x02 treated as "$"
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
120 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
9
Phonebook Commands
9.1. AT+CPBS
AT+CPBS
Select Phonebook Memory Storage
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Select Phonebook Memory Storage
Test Command
AT+CPBS=?
Response
+CPBS: (list of supported <storage>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CPBS?
Response
+CPBS: <storage>[,<used>,<total>]
OK
Write Command
AT+CPBS=<storage>
Response
TA selects current phone book memory storage, which is
used by other phone book commands.
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<storage>
"MC"
"RC"
"DC"
"LA"
"ME"
"BN"
"SD"
"VM"
"FD"
"LD"
"ON"
"SM"
ME missed (unanswered) calls list
ME received calls list
ME dialed calls list (+CPBW may not be applicable or this storage)(same as LD)
Last Number All list (LND/LNM/LNR)
ME phonebook
SIM barred dialed number
SIM service dial number
SIM voice mailbox
SIM fix dialing-phone book
SIM last-dialing-phone book
SIM (or ME) own numbers (MSISDNs) list
SIM phonebook
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
121 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
<used>
<total>
Integer type value indicating the total number of used locations in selected memory
Integer type value indicating the total number of locations in selected memory
NOTE
SIM phonebook record can stores up to 250pcs and ME phonebook record can store up to 100pcs.
9.2. AT+CPBW
AT+CPBW
Test Command
AT+CPBW=?
Write Phonebook Entry
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Write Phonebook Entry
Response
TA returns location range supported by the current storage,
the maximum length of <number> field, supported number
formats of the storage, and the maximum length of <text>
field.
+CPBW: (The range of supported <index>s), <nlength>, (list
of supported <type>s), <tlength>
OK
Write Command
AT+CPBW=<index>[,<number>[,<typ
e>[,<text>]]]
Response
TA writes phone book entry in location number <index> in the
current phone book memory storage selected with +CPBS.
Entry fields written are phone number <number> (in the
format <type>) and text <text> associated with the number. If
those fields are omitted, phone book entry is deleted. If
<index> is left out, but <number> is given, entry is written to
the first free location in the phone book.
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<nlength> Maximum length of phone number
<tlength> Maximum length of text for number
<index>
Location number
<number> Phone number
<type>
Type of number
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
122 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
<text>
129
Unknown type(IDSN format number)
145
International number type(ISDN format )
Text for phone number in current TE character set specified by +CSCS
NOTE
The following characters in <text> must be entered via the escape sequence:
GSM char
Seq.Seq.(hex)
Note
\
\5C 5C 35 43
(backslash)
"
\22 5C 32 32
(string delimiter)
BSP
\08 5C 30 38
(backspace)
NULL
\00 5C 30 30
(GSM null)
‘0’ (GSM null) may cause problems for application layer software when reading string lengths.
Example
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
AT+CSCS="GSM"
OK
AT+CPBW=10,"15021012496",129,"QUECTEL"
OK
//Make a new phonebook entry at location 10
AT+CPBW=10
//Delete entry at location 10
OK
9.3. AT+CPBR
Read Current Phonebook Entries
AT+CPBR Read Current Phonebook Entries
Test Command
AT+CPBR=?
Response
TA returns location range supported by the current storage as
a compound value and the maximum lengths of <number>
and <text> fields.
+CPBR: (list of supported <index>s),<nlength>,<tlength>
OK
Write Command
AT+CPBR=<index1>[,<index2>]
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
TA returns phone book entries in location number range
<index1>... <index2> from the current phone book memory
storage selected with +CPBS. If <index2> is left out, only
location <index1> is returned.
+CPBR:<index1>,<number>,<type>,<text>[<CR><LF>+C
PBR: .....+CPBR: <index2>, <number>, <type>, <text>]
Confidential / Released
123 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms.
Note: Operation of <index2>depends on the storage of read
phonebook entries.
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<index>
<nlength>
<tlength>
<index1>
<index2>
<number>
<type>
<text>
Location number
Maximum length of phone number
Maximum length of name for number
The first phone book record to read
The last phonebook record to read
Phone number
Type of number
Text name for phone number in current TE character set specified by +CSCS
Example
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
AT+CSCS="GSM"
OK
AT+CPBR=10
//Query phone book entries in location 10
+CPBR: 10,"15021012496",129,"QUECTEL"
OK
9.4. AT+CPBF
Find Phonebook Entries
AT+CPBF Find Phonebook Entries
Test Command
AT+CPBF=?
Response
+CPBF: <nlength>,<tlength>
OK
Write Command
AT+CPBF=[<findtext>]
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
TA returns phone book entries (from the current phone book
memory storage selected with +CPBS) which contain
alphanumeric string <findtext>.
[+CPBF: <index1>, <number>,<type>, <text>[[...]
<CR><LF>+CBPF: <index2>,<number>,<type>,<text>]
Confidential / Released
124 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
OK
Maximum Response Time
Depends on the storage of phonebook entries.
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<findtext>
<index1>
<index2>
<number>
<type>
<text>
<nlength>
<tlength>
String type field of maximum length <tlength> in current TE character set specified by
+CSCS.
Integer type values in the range of location numbers of phone book memory
Integer type values in the range of location numbers of phone book memory
Phone number in string type of format <type>
Type of address octet in integer format:
129
Unknown type (IDSN format number)
145
International number type (ISDN format )
String type field of maximum length <tlength> in current TE character set specified by
+CSCS
Integer type value indicating the maximum length of field <number>
Integer type value indicating the maximum length of field <text>
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
9.5. AT+CNUM
AT+CNUM
Subscriber Number
Subscriber Number
Test Command
AT+CNUM=?
Execution Command
AT+CNUM
Response
OK
Response
+CNUM: [<alpha1>],<number1>,<type1>
[<CR><LF>+CNUM: [<alpha2>],<number2>,<type2>
[...]]
OK
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
125 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Parameter
Optional alphanumeric string associated with <numberx>;used character set should be the
one selected with command. Select TE character set +CSCS
<numberx> Phone number in string type of format specified by <typex>
<typex>
Type of address octet in integer format (refer to GSM 04.08subclause 10.5.4.7)
<alphax>
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
126 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
10
GPRS Commands
10.1. AT+CGATT
AT+CGATT
Attach to/Detach from GPRS Service
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Attach to/Detach from GPRS Service
Test Command
AT+CGATT=?
Response
+CGATT: (list of supported <state>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CGATT?
Response
+CGATT: <state>
OK
Write Command
AT+CGATT=<state>
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<state>
75s, determined by network.
Indicates the state of GPRS attachment
0
Detached
1
Attached
Other values are reserved and will result in an ERROR response to the Write Command
Example
AT+CGATT=1
OK
AT+CGATT=0
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
//Attach to GPRS service
//Detach from GPRS service
Confidential / Released
127 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
//Query the current GPRS service state
AT+CGATT?
+CGATT: 0
OK
10.2. AT+CGDCONT
Define PDP Context
AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context
Test Command
AT+CGDCONT=?
Response
+CGDCONT: (range of supported <cid>s), <PDP_type>,
<APN>, <PDP_addr>, (list of supported <data_comp>s),
(list of supported <head_comp>s)
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
OK
Read Command
AT+CGDCONT?
Response
+CGDCONT:
<cid>,<PDP_type>,<APN>,<PDP_addr>,<data_comp>,<h
ead_comp>
<CR><LF>+CGDCONT:
<cid>,<PDP_type>,<APN>,<PDP_addr>,<data_comp>,<h
ead_comp>
…
OK
Write Command
AT+CGDCONT=<cid>[,<PDP_type>[,<
APN>[,<PDP_addr>[,<d_comp>[,<h_c
omp>]]]]]
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
(PDP Context Identifier) a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context
definition. The parameter is local to the TE-MT interface and is used in other PDP
context-related commands. The range of permitted values (minimum value=1) is returned
by the test form of the command
<PDP_type> (Packet Data Protocol type) a string parameter which specifies the type of packet data
protocol X25 ITU-T/CCITT X.25 layer 3 IP Internet Protocol (IETF STD 5) OSPIH Internet
Hosted Octet Stream Protocol PPP Point to Point Protocol (IETF STD 51)
<cid>
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
128 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
(Access Point Name) a string parameter that is a logical name that is used to select the
GGSN or the external packet data network. If the value is null or omitted, then the
subscription value will be requested
<PDP_addr> A string parameter identifies the MT in the address space applicable to the PDP. If the value
is null or omitted, then a value may be provided by the TE during the PDP startup
procedure or, failing that, a dynamic address will be requested. The allocated address may
be read using the +CGPADDR command
<d_comp> A numeric parameter that controls PDP data compression
0
Off (default if value is omitted)
Other values are reserved
<h_comp> A numeric parameter that controls PDP header compression
0
Off (default if value is omitted)
Other values are reserved
<APN>
Example
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","CMNET"
OK
10.3. AT+CGQREQ
AT+CGQREQ
//Define PDP context, <cid>=1,
<PDP_type>=IP,<APN>=CMNET
Quality of Service Profile (Requested)
Quality of Service Profile (Requested)
Test Command
AT+CGQREQ=?
Response
+CGQREQ: <PDP_type>,(list of supported <precedence>s),
(list of supported <delay>s),(list of supported <reliability>s),
(list of supported <peak>s),(list of supported <mean>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CGQREQ?
Response
+CGQREQ:
<cid>,<precedence>,<delay>,<reliability>,<peak>,<mean
>
<CR><LF>+CGQREQ:
<cid>,<precedence>,<delay>,<reliability>,<peak>,<mean
>
…
OK
Write Command
AT+CGQREQ=<cid>[,<precedence>[,
<delay>[,<reliability>[,<peak>[,<mean
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
OK
Confidential / Released
129 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
>]]]]]
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
A numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition (see
+CGDCONT command)
The following parameter are defined in GSM 03.60
<precedence> A numeric parameter which specifies the precedence class
<delay>
A numeric parameter which specifies the delay class
<reliability>
A numeric parameter which specifies the reliability class
<peak>
A numeric parameter which specifies the peak throughput class
<mean>
A numeric parameter which specifies the mean throughput class
<cid>
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
10.4. AT+CGQMIN
Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable)
AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable)
Test Command
AT+CGQMIN=?
Response
+CGQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list of supported <precedence>s),
(list of supported <delay>s), (list of supported <reliability>s),
(list of supported <peak>s), (list of supported <mean>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CGQMIN?
Response
+CGQMIN:
<cid>,<precedence>,<delay>,<reliability>,<peak>,<mean
>
<CR><LF>+CGQMIN:
<cid>,<precedence>,<delay>,<reliability>,<peak>,<mean
>
…
OK
Write Command
AT+CGQMIN=<cid>[,<precedence>[,<
delay>[,<reliability>[,<peak>[,<mean>
]]]]]
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
Confidential / Released
130 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
A numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition (see
+CGDCONT command)
The following parameters are defined in GSM 03.60.
<precedence> A numeric parameter which specifies the precedence class
<delay>
A numeric parameter which specifies the delay class
<reliability>
A numeric parameter which specifies the reliability class
<peak>
A numeric parameter which specifies the peak throughput class
<mean>
A numeric parameter which specifies the mean throughput class
<cid>
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
10.5. AT+CGACT
PDP Context Activate or Deactivate
AT+CGACT PDP Context Activate or Deactivate
Test Command
AT+CGACT=?
Response
+CGACT: (list of supported <state>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CGACT?
Response
+CGACT:
<cid>,<state>[<CR><LF>+CGACT:<cid><state>…]
OK
Write Command
AT+CGACT=<state>[,<cid>]
Response
OK
NO CARRIER
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
150s, determined by network.
Reference
GSM 07.07
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
131 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Parameter
<state>
<cid>
Indicates the state of PDP context activation
0
Deactivated
1
Activated
Other values are reserved and will result in an ERROR response to the Write Command
A numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition (see +CGDCONT
command). The default value is 1.
NOTE
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
If context is deactivated successfully, NO CARRIER is returned.
Example
AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","CMNET"
OK
AT+CGACT=1,1
OK
AT+CGACT=0,1
NO CARRIER
//Define PDP context
//Activated PDP
//Deactivated PDP
10.6. AT+CGDATA Enter Data State
AT+CGDATA Enter Data State
Test Command
AT+CGDATA=?
Response
+CGDATA: (list of supported <L2P>s)
OK
Write Command
AT+CGDATA=<L2P>[,<cid>[,<cid>[,…
]]]
Response
OK
NO CARRIER
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
132 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Parameter
<L2P>
<cid>
A string parameter that indicates the layer 2 protocol to be used between the TE and MT:
PPP - Point to Point protocol for a PDP such as IP
Other values are not supported and will result in an ERROR response to the execution
command
A numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition (see +CGDCONT
command)
10.7. AT+CGPADDR
Show PDP Address
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
AT+CGPADDR
Show PDP Address
Test Command
AT+CGPADDR=?
Response
+CGPADDR: (list of defined <cid>s)
OK
Write Command
AT+CGPADDR=<cid>
Response
+CGPADDR: <cid>[,<PDP_addr>]
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
300ms
A numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition (see +CGDCONT
command)
<PDP_addr> A string that identifies the MT in the address space applicable to the PDP. The address may
be static or dynamic. For a static address, it will be the one set by the +CGDCONT
command when the context was defined. For a dynamic address it will be the one assigned
during the last PDP context activation that used the context definition referred to <cid>.
<PDP_address> is omitted if none is available
<cid>
NOTE
This command dictates the behaviour of PPP in the ME but not that of any other GPRS-enabled
foreground layer, e.g. browser.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
133 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Example
AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","CMNET"
OK
AT+CGACT=1,1
OK
AT+CGPADDR=1
+CGPADDR: 1,"10.76.51.180"
//Define PDP context
//Activated PDP
//Show PDP address
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
10.8. AT+CGCLASS
AT+CGCLASS
GPRS Mobile Station Class
GPRS Mobile Station Class
Test Command
AT+CGCLASS=?
Response
+CGCLASS: (list of supported <class>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CGCLASS?
Response
+CGCLASS: <class>
OK
Write Command
AT+CGCLASS=<class>
Response
OK
ERROR
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<class>
30s, determined by network.
A string parameter which indicates the GPRS mobile class (Functionality in descending
order)
"B"
Class B
"CG" Class C in GPRS only mode
"CC" Class C in circuit switched only mode
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
134 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
10.9. AT+CGEREP Control Unsolicited GPRS Event Reporting
AT+CGEREP Control Unsolicited GPRS Event Reporting
Test Command
AT+CGEREP=?
Response
+CGEREP: (list of supported <mode>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CGEREP?
Response
+CGEREP: <mode>
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Write Command
AT+CGEREP=<mode>
Response
OK
ERROR
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<mode>
0
1
NOTE
Buffer unsolicited result codes in the MT; if MT result code buffer is full, the oldest
one can be discarded. No codes are forwarded to the TE
Discard unsolicited result codes when MT-TE link is reserved (e.g. in on-line data
mode); otherwise forward them directly to the TE
Unsolicited Result Codes supported:
+CGEV: NW DEACT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>[,<cid>]
+CGEV: ME DEACT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>[,<cid>]
+CGEV: NW DETACH
+CGEV: ME CLASS <class>
Parameters
<PDP_type> Packet Data Protocol type (see +CGDCONT command)
<PDP_addr> Packet Data Protocol address (see +CGDCONT command)
<cid>
Context ID (see +CGDCONT command)
<class>
GPRS mobile class (see +CGCLASS command)
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
135 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
10.10. AT+CGREG
AT+CGREG
Network Registration Status
Network Registration Status
Test Command
AT+CGREG=?
Response
+CGREG: (list of supported <n>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CGREG?
Response
+CGREG: <n>,<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Write Command
AT+CGREG=[<n>]
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<n>
<stat>
<lac>
<ci>
0
1
2
Disable network registration unsolicited result code
Enable network registration unsolicited result code +CGREG:<stat>
Enable network registration and location information unsolicited result code
+CGREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]
0
Not registered, ME is not currently searching a new operator to register to
1
Registered, home network
2
Not registered, but ME is currently searching a new operator to register to
3
Registration denied
4
Unknown
5
Registered, roaming
String type; two byte location area code in hexadecimal format (e.g. "00C3" equals 195 in
decimal)
String type; two bytes cell ID in hexadecimal format
NOTE
For parameter state, options of 0 and 1 are supported only.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
136 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Example
AT+CGATT=0
NO CARRIER
+CGREG: 0,"1878","0873"
AT+CGATT=1
OK
+CGREG: 2,"1878","0873"
+CGREG: 1,"1878","0873"
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
10.11. AT+CGSMS
AT+CGSMS
Test Command
AT+CGSMS=?
Select Service for MO SMS Messages
Select Service for MO SMS Messages
Response
+CGSMS: (list of currently available <service>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CGSMS?
Response
+CGSMS: <service>
OK
Write Command
AT+CGSMS=[<service>]
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<service>
300ms
A numeric parameter which indicates the service or service preference to be used
0
GPRS
1
Circuit switch
2
GPRS preferred (use circuit switched if GPRS not available)
3
Circuit switch preferred (use GPRS if circuit switched not available)
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
137 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
NOTE
The circuit switched service route is the default method.
10.12. AT+QGPCLASS
AT+QGPCLASS
Change GPRS Multi-slot Class
Change GPRS Multi-slot Class
Test Command
AT+QGPCLASS=?
Response
MULTISLOT CLASS: (list of currently available <class>s)
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
OK
Read Command
AT+QGPCLASS?
Response
MULTISLOT CLASS: <class>
OK
Write Command
AT+QGPCLASS=<class>
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<class>
NOTE
GPRS multi-slot class
1-12 Default value is 12
Need to reboot for the change of GPRS multi-slot class to take effect.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
138 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
11
TCPIP Commands
11.1. AT+QIOPEN
Start up TCP or UDP Connection
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
AT+QIOPEN Start up TCP or UDP Connection
Test Command
AT+QIOPEN=?
Response
+QIOPEN: (list of supported <mode>)s,(IP address
range),(port)
<CR><LF>+QIOPEN: (list of supported <mode>s),(domain
name),(port)
OK
Write Command
AT+QIOPEN=[<index>,]<mode>,<IP
address>/<domain name>,<port>
Response
If format is right, respond:
OK
Otherwise respond:
ERROR
If the connection has already existed, respond:
ALREADY CONNECT
And then if connection is successful, respond:
[<index>,] CONNECT OK
Otherwise respond:
[<index>,] CONNECT FAIL
Maximum Response Time
Reference
75s, determined by network.
Parameter
<index>
A numeric indicates which socket opens the connection. M66 supports at most 6
sockets at the same time. This parameter is necessary only if AT+QIMUX was set as 1
(refer to AT+QIMUX). When AT+QIMUX was set as 0, the parameter MUST be
omitted
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
139 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
A string parameter which indicates the connection type
"TCP"
Establish a TCP connection
"UDP"
Establish a UDP connection
<IP address>
A string parameter that gives the address of the remote server in dotted decimal style.
<port>
The port of the remote server
0-65535
<domain name> A string parameter which represents the domain name address of the remote server
<mode>
NOTES
1.
2.
This command is allowed to establish a TCP/UDP connection only when the state is IP INITIAL or IP
STATUS or IP CLOSE. So it is necessary to process "AT+QIDEACT" or "AT+QICLOSE" before
establishing a TCP/UDP connection with this command when the state is not IP INITIAL or IP
STATUS or IP CLOSE.
If AT+QIMUX was set as 0 and the current state is CONNECT OK, which means the connection
channel is used, it will reply "ALREADY CONNECT" after issuing the Write command.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
11.2. AT+QISEND
Send Data through TCP or UDP Connection
AT+QISEND Send Data through TCP or UDP Connection
Test Command
AT+QISEND=?
Response
+QISEND: <length>
OK
Execution Command
AT+QISEND
response"> ", then type data to send,
tap CTRL+Z to send, tap ESC to cancel
the operation
Response
This command is used to send changeable length data.
If connection is not established or disconnected:
ERROR
If sending succeeds:
SEND OK
If sending fails:
SEND FAIL
Write Command
1)When AT+QIMUX=0
AT+QISEND=<length>
2)When AT+QIMUX=1
AT+QISEND=<index>[,<length>]
Response
This command is used to send fixed-length data or send data
on the given socket (defined by <index>).
If connection is not established or disconnected:
ERROR
If sending succeeds:
SEND OK
If sending fails:
SEND FAIL
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
140 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<index>
<length>
The index of the socket for sending data. This parameter is necessary only if AT+QIMUX
was set as 1 (refer to AT+QIMUX). When AT+QIMUX was set as 0, the parameter MUST
be omitted
A numeric parameter which indicates the length of data to be sent, it MUST be less than
1460
NOTES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
This command is used to send data on the TCP or UDP connection that has been established
already. ‘Ctrl+Z’ is used as a termination symbol. ESC is used to cancel sending data.
The maximum length of the data to input at a time is 1460.
There are at most 1460 bytes that can be sent each time.
Only send data at the status of connection, otherwise respond with ERROR.
SEND OK means the data have been put into the send window to send rather than it has received
the ACK message for the data from the remote node. To check whether the data has been sent to the
remote node, it is necessary to execute the command AT+QISACK to query it.
11.3. AT+QICLOSE
AT+QICLOSE
Close TCP or UDP Connection
Close TCP or UDP Connection
Test Command
AT+QICLOSE=?
Response
OK
Execution Command
AT+QICLOSE
Response
If close succeeds:
CLOSE OK
If close fails:
ERROR
Write Command
AT+QICLOSE=<index>
Response
If close succeeds:
<index>, CLOSE OK
If close fails:
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
141 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Parameter
<index>
The index of the socket for sending data. This parameter is necessary only if AT+QIMUX
was set as 1 (refer to AT+QIMUX). When AT+QIMUX was set as 0, the parameter MUST
be omitted
NOTES
1.
2.
3.
Execution Command AT+QICLOSE:
 If QISRVC is 1 (please refer to AT+QISRVC) and QIMUX is 0 (please refer to AT+QIMUX), this
command will close the connection in which the module is used as a client.
 If QISRVC is 1 and QIMUX is 1, it will return ERROR.
 If QISRVC is 2 and QIMUX equals 0 and the module is used as a server and some clients have
been connected to it, this command will close the connection between the module and the
remote client.
 If QISRVC is 2 and QIMUX is 0 and the module is in listening state without any client, this
command will cause the module to quit the listening state.
 If QISRVC is 2 and QIMUX is 1 and the module is used as a server, this command will close all
the income connection and cause the module to quit the listening state.
Write Command AT+QICLOSE=<index>:
 This command is valid only if QIMUX is 1.
 If QISRVC is 1 and QIMUX is 1, this command will close the corresponding connection
according to <index> and the module used as a client in the connection.
 If QISRVC is 2 and QIMUX is 1, this command will close the incoming connection according to
<index>.
If QISRVC is 1 and QIMUX is 0, AT+QICLOSE only closes the connection when the statue is
CONNECTING or CONNECT OK, otherwise respond with ERROR. After closing the connection, the
status is IP CLOSE.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
11.4. AT+QIDEACT
AT+QIDEACT
Deactivate GPRS/CSD PDP Context
Deactivate GPRS/CSD PDP Context
Test Command
AT+QIDEACT=?
Response
OK
Execution Command
AT+QIDEACT
Response
If close succeeds:
DEACT OK
If close fails:
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
40s, determined by network.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
142 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Reference
NOTES
1.
2.
Except at the status of IP INITIAL, you can deactivate GPRS/CSD PDP context by AT+QIDEACT.
After closing the connection, the status becomes to IP INITIAL.
CSD context is not supported at present.
11.5. AT+QILPORT
Set Local Port
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
AT+QILPORT Set Local Port
Test Command
AT+QILPORT=?
Response
+QILPORT: (list of supported <port>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QILPORT?
Response
<mode>: <port>
<CR><LF><mode>: <port>
OK
Write Command
AT+QILPORT=<mode>,<port>
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<mode>
<port>
A string parameter which indicates the connection type
"TCP" TCP local port
"UDP" UDP local port
0-65535 A numeric parameter which indicates the local port
NOTE
This command is used to set the port for listening.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
143 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
11.6. AT+QIREGAPP Start TCPIP Task and Set APN, User Name and
Password
AT+QIREGAPP Start TCPIP Task and Set APN, User Name and Password
Test Command
AT+QIREGAPP=?
Response
+QIREGAPP: "APN","USER","PWD"
OK
Read Command
AT+QIREGAPP?
Response
+QIREGAPP: <apn>,<user name>,<password>
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
OK
Write Command
AT+QIREGAPP=<apn>,<user
name>,< password>[,<rate>]
Response
OK
ERROR
Execution Command
AT+QIREGAPP
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<apn>
A string parameter which indicates the GPRS access point name or the call number of CSD
<user name>A string parameter which indicates the GPRS/CSD user name
<password> A string parameter which indicates the GPRS/CSD password
<rate>
The speed of data transmit for CSD
NOTES
1.
2.
3.
The write command and execution command of this command is valid only at the status of IP
INITIAL. After operating this command, the status will become to IP START.
The value of QICSGP (please refer to AT+QICSGP) defines what kind of bearer (GPRS or CSD) the
parameters are used for.
CSD function and related configuration are not supported at present.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
144 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
11.7. AT+QIACT
AT+QIACT
Activate GPRS/CSD Context
Activate GPRS/CSD Context
Test Command
AT+QIACT=?
Response
OK
Execution Command
AT+QIACT
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
150s, determined by network.
Reference
NOTES
1.
2.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
AT+QIACT only activates GPRS/CSD context at the status of IP START. After operating this
command, the status will become to IP CONFIG. If TA accepts the activated operation, the status will
become to IP IND; after GPRS/CSD context is activated successfully, the status will become to IP
GPRSACT, respond with OK, and otherwise respond with ERROR.
CSD context is not supported at present.
11.8. AT+QILOCIP Get Local IP Address
AT+QILOCIP Get Local IP Address
Test Command
AT+QILOCIP=?
Response
OK
Execution Command
AT+QILOCIP
Response
If execution successful, respond:
<IP address>
Otherwise respond:
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<IP address>
A string parameter which indicates the IP address assigned from GPRS or CSD
network
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
145 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
NOTES
1.
2.
Only at the following status: IP GPRSACT, IP STATUS, TCP/UDP CONNECTING, CONNECT OK, IP
CLOSE can get local IP address by AT+QILOCIP, otherwise respond ERROR. And if the status
before executing the command is IP GPRSACT, the status will become to IP STATUS after the
command.
CSD function is not supported at present.
11.9. AT+QISTAT
AT+QISTAT
Test Command
AT+QISTAT=?
Query Current Connection Status
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Query Current Connection Status
Execution Command
AT+QISTAT
Response
OK
Response
When AT+QIMUX=0, respond:
OK
STATE: <state>
When AT+QIMUX=1, respond:
List of
(+QISTAT: <index>,<mode>,<addr>,<port><CR><LF>)
OK
Maximum Response Time
Reference
Parameter
<state>
300ms
A string parameter to indicate the status of the connection
"IP INITIAL"
The TCPIP stack is in idle state
"IP START"
The TCPIP stack has been registered
"IP CONFIG"
It has been start-up to activate GPRS/CSD context
"IP IND"
It is activating GPRS/CSD context
"IP GPRSACT"
GPRS/CSD context has been activated successfully
"IP STATUS"
The local IP address has been gotten by the command
AT+QILOCIP
"TCP CONNECTING"
It is trying to establish a TCP connection
"UDP CONNECTING"
It is trying to establish a UDP connection
"IP CLOSE"
The TCP/UDP connection has been closed
"CONNECT OK"
The TCP/UDP connection has been established successfully
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
146 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
"PDP DEACT"
GPRS/CSD context was deactivated because of unknown
reason
If ATV was set to 0 by the command ATV0, the TCPIP stack gives the following numeric to
indicate the former status
0
"IP INITIAL"
1
"IP START"
2
"IP CONFIG"
3
"IP IND"
4
"IP GPRSACT"
5
"IP STATUS"
6
"TCP CONNECTING" or "UDP CONNECTING"
7
"IP CLOSE"
8
"CONNECT OK"
9
"PDP DEACT"
<index>
<mode>
<addr>
<port>
NOTES
1.
2.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
The index of the connection, the range is (0-5)
The type of the connection
"TCP"
TCP connection
"UDP"
UDP connection
The IP address of the remote
The port of the remote
Display former style of response when QIMUX=0 and the later style of response when QIMUX=1.
CSD context is not supported at present.
11.10. AT+QISTATE
AT+QISTATE
Test Command
AT+QISTATE=?
Query Connection Status of the Current Access
Query Connection Status of the Current Access
Execution Command
AT+QISTATE
Response
OK
Response
When AT+QIMUX=0, respond:
OK
STATE: <state>
When AT+QIMUX=1, respond:
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
147 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
STATE: <state>
+QISTATE:
<index>,<mode>,<addr>,<port>,<socketstate>
OK
Otherwise respond:
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
Reference
Parameter
<state>
300ms
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
A string parameter to indicate the status of the connection
When AT+QIMUX=0:
"IP INITIAL"
"IP START"
"IP CONFIG"
"IP IND"
"IP GPRSACT"
"IP STATUS"
<index>
The TCPIP stack is in idle state.
The TCPIP stack has been registered.
It has been start-up to activate GPRS/CSD context.
It is activating GPRS/CSD context.
GPRS/CSD context has been activated successfully.
The local IP address has been gotten by the command
AT+QILOCIP.
"TCP CONNECTING" It is trying to establish a TCP connection.
"UDP CONNECTING" It is trying to establish a UDP connection.
"IP CLOSE"
The TCP/UDP connection has been closed.
"CONNECT OK"
The TCP/UDP connection has been established successfully.
"PDP DEACT"
GPRS/CSD context was deactivated because of unknown
reason.
When AT+QIMUX=1:
"IP INITIAL"
The TCPIP stack is in idle state.
"IP START"
The TCPIP stack has been registered.
"IP CONFIG"
It has been start-up to activate GPRS/CSD context.
"IP IND"
It is activating GPRS/CSD context.
"IP GPRSACT"
GPRS/CSD context has been activated successfully.
"IP STATUS"
The local IP address has been gotten by the command
AT+QILOCIP.
“IP PROCESSING” Data phase. Processing the existing connection now.
"PDP DEACT"
GPRS/CSD context was deactivated because of unknown
reason.
The index of the connection, the range is (0-5)
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
148 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
<mode>
<addr>
<port>
<socketstate>
The type of the connection
"TCP"
TCP connection
"UDP"
UDP connection
The IP address of the remote
The port of the remote
A string parameter to indicate the status of the access connection, including
INITIAL,CONNECTED.
11.11. AT+QISSTAT
AT+QISSTAT
Test Command
AT+QISSTAT=?
Query the Current Server Status
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Query the Current Server Status
Response
OK
Execution Command
AT+QISSTAT
Response
When AT+QIMUX=0, respond:
OK
S: <ServerState>
When AT+QIMUX=1, respond:
OK
S: <ServerState>
C : <index>,<mode>,<addr>,<port>
Otherwise respond:
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
Reference
Parameter
<ServerState>
<index>
<mode>
300ms
A string parameter to indicate the status of the connection
"INITIAL"
The TCPIP stack is in idle state
"OPENNING"
The TCPIP stack has been registered
"LISTENING"
Listening to server port
"CLOSING"
Closing connection now
The index of the connection, the range is (0-4)
The type of the connection
"TCP" TCP connection
"UDP" UDP connection
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
149 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
The IP address of the remote
The port of the remote
<addr>
<port>
11.12. AT+QIDNSCFG
AT+QIDNSCFG
Configure Domain Name Server
Configure Domain Name Server
Test Command
AT+QIDNSCFG=?
Response
OK
Read Command
AT+QIDNSCFG?
Response
PrimaryDns: <pri_dns>
SecondaryDns: <sec_dns>
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
OK
Write Command
AT+QIDNSCFG=<pri_dns>[,<sec_dns
>]
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<pri_dns> A string parameter which indicates the IP address of the primary domain name server
<sec_dns> A string parameter which indicates the IP address of the secondary domain name server
NOTES
1. Because TA will negotiate to get the DNS server from GPRS/CSD network automatically when
activating GPRS/CSD context, it is STRONGLY suggested to configure the DNS server at the status
of IP GPRSACT, IP STATUS, CONNECT OK and IP CLOSE if it is necessary.
2. CSD function and configuration are not supported currently.
11.13. AT+QIDNSGIP Query the IP Address of Given Domain Name
AT+QIDNSGIP Query the IP Address of Given Domain Name
Test Command
AT+QIDNSGIP=?
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
OK
Confidential / Released
150 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Write Command
AT+QIDNSGIP=<domain name>
Response
OK
ERROR
If succeeds, return:
<IP address>
If fails, return:
ERROR: <err>
STATE: <state>
Maximum Response Time
14s, determined by network.
Reference
Parameter
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
<domain name> A string parameter which indicates the domain name
<IP address>
A string parameter which indicates the IP address corresponding to the domain name
<err>
A numeric parameter which indicates the error code
1
DNS not Authorized
2
Invalid parameter
3
Network error
4
No server
5
Time out
6
No configuration
7
No memory
8
Unknown error
<state>
Refer to AT+QISTAT
11.14. AT+QIDNSIP Connect with IP Address or Domain Name Server
AT+QIDNSIP Connect with IP Address or Domain Name Server
Test Command
AT+QIDNSIP=?
Response
+QIDNSIP: (list of supported <mode>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QIDNSIP?
Response
+QIDNSIP: <mode>
OK
Write Command
AT+QIDNSIP=<mode>
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
OK
ERROR
Confidential / Released
151 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<mode>
A numeric parameter indicates which kind of server format is used when establishing the
connection: IP address server or domain name server
0
The address of the remote server is a dotted decimal IP address
1
The address of the remote server is a domain name
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
11.15. AT+QIHEAD
AT+QIHEAD
Test Command
AT+QIHEAD=?
Add an IP Header when Receiving Data
Add an IP Header when Receiving Data
Response
+QIHEAD: (list of supported <mode>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QIHEAD?
Response
+QIHEAD: <mode>
OK
Write Command
AT+QIHEAD=<mode>
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<mode>
A numeric parameter which indicates whether or not to add an IP header before the
received data
0
DO Not add IP header
1
Add a header before the received data, and the format is "IPD(data length):"
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
152 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
11.16. AT+QIAUTOS
AT+QIAUTOS
Set Auto Sending Timer
Set Auto Sending Timer
Test Command
AT+QIAUTOS=?
Response
+QIAUTOS: (list of supported <mode>s), (list of supported
<time>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QIAUTOS?
Response
+QIAUTOS: <mode>,<time>
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
OK
Write Command
AT+QIAUTOS=<mode>[,<time>]
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<mode>
<time>
A numeric parameter which indicates whether or not to set timer when sending data
0
DO Not set timer for data sending
1
Set timer for data sending
A numeric parameter which indicates a time in seconds
After the time expires since AT+QISEND, the input data will be sent automatically
11.17. AT+QIPROMPT Set Prompt of ‘>’ when Sending Data
AT+QIPROMPT
Set Prompt of ‘>’ when Sending Data
Test Command
AT+QIPROMPT=?
Response
+QIPROMPT: (list of supported <send prompt>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QIPROMPT?
Response
+QIPROMPT: <send prompt>
OK
Write Command
AT+QIPROMPT=<send prompt>
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
OK
Confidential / Released
153 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<send prompt>
A numeric parameter which indicates whether or not to echo prompt ">" after
issuing AT+QISEND Command
0
No prompt ">" and show "SEND OK" when sending successes
1
Echo prompt ">" and show "SEND OK" when sending successes
2
No prompt and not show "SEND OK" when sending successes
3
Echo prompt ">" and show “socket ID” "SEND OK" when sending
successes
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
11.18. AT+QISERVER
Configured as Server
AT+QISERVER Configured as Server
Test Command
AT+QISERVER=?
Response
OK
Read Command
AT+QISERVER?
Response
+QISERVER: <mode>, <num>
OK
Execution Command
AT+QISERVER
Response
OK
ERROR
If configured as server successfully, return:
SERVER OK
If configured as server unsuccessfully, return:
CONNECT FAIL
Write Command
AT+QISERVER=<type>[,<max>]
Response
OK
ERROR
If configured as server successfully, return:
SERVER OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
154 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
If configured as server unsuccessfully, return:
CONNECT FAIL
Maximum Response Time
150s, determined by network.
Reference
Parameter
<mode>
<num>
<type>
<max>
0
NOT configured as server
1
Configured as server
The number of clients that have been connected in. The range is 0~5
A numeric indicates the type of the server
0
TCP server
1
UDP server
The maximum number of clients allowed to connect in. The default value is 1. The range
is 1-5
NOTES
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
1. Execution command configures the module as a TCP server and the maximum allowed client is 1.
2. The parameter <max> is excluded when QIMUX is 0.
11.19. AT+QICSGP Select CSD or GPRS as the Bearer
AT+QICSGP Select CSD or GPRS as the Bearer
Test Command
AT+QICSGP=?
Response
+QICSGP: 0-CSD,DIAL NUMBER,USER
NAME,PASSWORD,RATE(0-3)
+QICSGP: 1-GPRS,APN,USER NAME,PASSWORD
OK
Read Command
AT+QICSGP?
Response
+QICSGP: <mode>
OK
Write Command
AT+QICSGP=<mode>[,(<apn>,<user
name>,<password>)/(<dial
number>,<user
name>,<password>,<rate>)]
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
OK
ERROR
Confidential / Released
155 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<mode>
A numeric parameter which indicates the bearer type
0
Set CSD as the bearer for TCPIP connection
1
Set GPRS as the bearer for TCPIP connection
GPRS parameters:
<apn>
A string parameter which indicates the access point name
<user name>
A string parameter which indicates the user name
<password>
A string parameter which indicates the password
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
CSD parameters:
<dial number> A string parameter which indicates the CSD dial numbers
<user name>
A string parameter which indicates the CSD user name
<password>
A string parameter which indicates the CSD password
<rate>
A numeric parameter which indicates the CSD connection rate
0
2400
1
4800
2
9600
3
14400
NOTE
CSD configuration is not supported at present.
11.20. AT+QISRVC
AT+QISRVC
Test Command
AT+QISRVC=?
Choose Connection
Choose Connection
Response
+QISRVC: (list of supported <connection>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QISRVC?
Response
+QISRVC: <connection>
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
156 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Write Command
AT+QISRVC=<connection>
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<connection>
NOTE
A numeric parameter which indicates the chosen connection
1
Choose the connection in which MS used as a client
2
Choose the connection in which MS used as a server
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
There could be two connections at one time: one connection is that MS connects with a remote server as
a client; the other connection is that MS accepts a remote client as a server. Using this Command to
specify which connection data will be sent through.
11.21. AT+QISHOWRA Set Whether or Not to Display the Address of
Sender
AT+QISHOWRA Set Whether or Not to Display the Address of Sender
Test Command
AT+QISHOWRA=?
Response
+QISHOWRA: (list of supported <mode>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QISHOWRA?
Response
+QISHOWRA: <mode>
OK
Write Command
AT+QISHOWRA=<mode>
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
157 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Parameter
<mode>
A numeric parameter which indicates whether or not to show the address (including IP
address in dotted decimal style of the remote end) when receiving data.
0
DO NOT show the address. Default
1
Show the address; the format to show the address is like: RECV FROM:
<IP ADDRESS>:<PORT>
11.22. AT+QISCON
Save TCPIP Application Context
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
AT+QISCON Save TCPIP Application Context
Test Command
AT+QISCON=?
Read Command
AT+QISCON?
Response
OK
Response
TA returns TCPIP application context, which consists of the
following AT command parameters.
SHOW APPTCPIP CONTEXT
+QIDNSIP:<mode>
+QIPROMPT:<sendprompt>
+QIHEAD:<iphead>
+QISHOWRA:<srip>
+QICSGP:<csgp>
Gprs Config APN:<apn>
Gprs Config UserId:<gusr>
Gprs Config Password:<gpwd>
Gprs Config inactivityTimeout:<timeout>
CSD Dial Number:<cnum>
CSD Config UserId:<cusr>
CSD Config Password:<cpwd>
CSD Config rate:<crate>
App Tcpip Mode:<mode>
In Transparent Transfer Mode
Number of Retry:<nmRetry>
Wait Time:<waitTm>
Send Size:<sendSz>
esc:<esc>
OK
Execution Command
AT+QISCON
Response
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
158 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Reference
Parameter
<mode>
See AT+QIDNSIP
<sendprompt> See AT+QIPROMPT
<iphead>
See AT+QIHEAD
<srip>
See AT+QISHOWRA
<csgp>
See AT+QICSGP
<apn>
See AT+QICSGP
<gusr>
See AT+QICSGP
<gpwd>
See AT+QICSGP
<timeout>
See AT+QICSGP
<cnum>
See AT+QICSGP
<cusr>
See AT+QICSGP
<cpwd>
See AT+QICSGP
<crate>
See AT+QICSGP
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
The following four parameters are only for transparent transfer mode.
<nmRetry>
See AT+QITCFG
<waitTm>
See AT+QITCFG
<sendSz>
See AT+QITCFG
<esc>
See AT+QITCFG
NOTES
1. The execution command TA saves TCPIP Application Context which consists of the following AT
Command parameters, and when system is rebooted, the parameters will be loaded automatically:
AT+QIDNSIP,AT+QIPROMPT,AT+QIHEAD,AT+QISHOWRA, AT+QICSGP, AT+QITCFG.
2. The execution command only save the corresponding parameters of the foreground context (refer to
AT+QIFGCNT).
3. CSD configuration is not supported at present.
11.23. AT+QIMODE Select TCPIP Transfer Mode
AT+QIMODE Select TCPIP Transfer Mode
Test Command
AT+QIMODE=?
Response
+QIMODE:(0-NORMAL MODE,1-TRANSPARENT MODE)
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
159 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Read Command
AT+QIMODE?
Response
+QIMODE: <mode>
OK
Write Command
AT+QIMODE=<mode>
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<mode>
0
1
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Normal mode. In this mode, the data should be sent by the command
AT+QISEND
Transparent mode. In this mode, UART will enter data mode after TCP/UDP
connection has been established. In data mode, all input data from UART will be
sent to the remote end. +++ can help to switch data mode to command mode. And
then ATO can help to switch command mode to data mode.
11.24. AT+QITCFG
AT+QITCFG
Test Command
AT+QITCFG=?
Configure Transparent Transfer Mode
Configure Transparent Transfer Mode
Response
+QITCFG: (list of supported <NmRetry>s),(list of supported
<WaitTm>s),(list of supported <SendSz>s),(list of supported
<esc>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QITCFG?
Response
+QITCFG: <NmRetry>,<WaitTm>,<SendSz>,<esc>
OK
Write Command
AT+QITCFG=<NmRetry>,<WaitTm>,<
SendSz>,<esc>
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
160 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Parameter
<NmRetry>
<WaitTm>
<SendSz>
<esc>
Number of times to retry to send an IP packet
Number of 100ms intervals to wait for serial input before sending the packet
Size in bytes of data block to be received from serial port before sending
Whether to turn on the escape sequence or not, default is TRUE
NOTES
1. <WaitTm> and <SendSz> are two conditions to send data packet.
2. Firstly, if the length of the input data from UART is greater than or equal to <SendSz>, the TCPIP
stack will send the data by length <SendSz> to the remote.
3. Secondly, if the length of the input data from UART is less than <SendSz>, and the idle time keeps
beyond the time defined by <WaitTm>, the TCPIP stack will send all the data in the buffer to the
remote.
4. This command is invalid when QIMUX is 1.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
11.25. AT+QISHOWPT Control Whether or Not to Show the Protocol
Type
AT+QISHOWPT Control Whether or Not to Show the Protocol Type
Test Command
AT+QISHOWPT=?
Response
+QISHOWPT: (list of supported <mode>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QISHOWPT?
Response
+QISHOWPT: <mode>
OK
Write Command
AT+QISHOWPT=<mode>
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
161 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Parameter
0
<mode>
DO NOT show the transport protocol type at the end of header of the received
TCP/UDP data
Show the transport protocol type at the end of header of the received TCP/UDP
data as the following format. IPD (data length)(TCP/UDP):
1
NOTE
This command is invalid if QIHEAD was set as 0 by the command AT+QIHEAD=0.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
11.26. AT+QIMUX
Control Whether or Not to Enable Multiple TCPIP
Session
AT+QIMUX
Control Whether or Not to Enable Multiple TCPIP Session
Test Command
AT+QIMUX=?
Response
+QIMUX: (list of supported <mode>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QIMUX?
Response
+QIMUX: <mode>
OK
Write Command
AT+QIMUX=<mode>
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<mode>
0
1
DO NOT enable multiple TCPIP session at the same time
Enable multiple TCPIP session at the same time
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
162 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
11.27. AT+QISHOWLA Control Whether or Not to Display Local IP
Address
AT+QISHOWLA Control Whether or Not to Display Local IP Address
Test Command
AT+QISHOWLA=?
Response
+QISHOWLA: (list of supported <mode>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QISHOWLA?
Response
+QISHOWLA: <mode>
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
OK
Write Command
AT+QISHOWLA=<mode>
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<mode>
A numeric parameter indicates whether or not to show the destination address before
receiving data.
0
DO NOT show the destination address
1
Show the destination address: TO:<IP ADDRESS>
NOTE
Because M66 can activate two GPRS contexts at the same time, i.e. M66 can get two local IP addresses.
It is necessary to point out the destination of the received data when two GPRS contexts have been
activated at the same time.
11.28. AT+QIFGCNT
AT+QIFGCNT
Select a Context as Foreground Context
Select a Context as Foreground Context
Test Command
AT+QIFGCNT=?
Response
+QIFGCNT: (list of supported <id>s)
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
163 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Read Command
AT+QIFGCNT?
Response
+QIFGCNT: <id>,<channel>
OK
Write Command
AT+QIFGCNT=<id>
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
<id>
A numeric indicates which context will be set as foreground context. The range is 0-1
<channel> A numeric indicates which channel is controlling the context <id>
0
VIRTUAL_UART_1
1
VIRTUAL_UART_2
2
VIRTUAL_UART_3
3
VIRTUAL_UART_4
255
The context is not controlled by any channel
NOTE
When CMUX is opened, if the status of the context defined by <id> is not IP_INITIAL and the context is
controlled by the other channel, it will return ERROR.
11.29. AT+QISACK
AT+QISACK
Test Command
AT+QISACK=?
Query the Data Information for Sending
Query the Data Information for Sending
Execution Command
AT+QISACK
Response
OK
Response
+QISACK: <sent>, <acked>, <nAcked>
OK
Write Command
AT+QISACK=<n>
Response
+QISACK: <sent>, <acked>, <nAcked>
OK
Maximum Response Time
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
300ms
Confidential / Released
164 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Reference
Parameter
<n>
<sent>
<acked>
<nAcked>
The index for querying the connection
A numeric indicates the total length of the data that has been sent through the session
A numeric indicates the total length of the data that has been acknowledged by the remote
A numeric indicates the total length of the data that has been sent but not acknowledged by
the remote
NOTES
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
1. Write command is invalid when QIMUX was set as 0 by the command AT+QIMUX=0.
2. This command could be affected by the command AT+QISRVC. If the QISRVC was set as 1, this
command is used to query the information of sending data during the session in which M66 serves as
a client. If the QISRVC was set as 2, this command is used to query the data information for sending
during the session in which M66 serves as a server.
11.30. AT+QINDI
AT+QINDI
Set the Method to Handle Received TCP/IP Data
Set the Method to Handle Received TCP/IP Data
Test Command
AT+QINDI=?
Response
+QINDI: (list of supported <m>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QINDI?
Response
+QINDI: <m>
OK
Write Command
AT+QINDI=<m>
Maximum Response Time
Response
OK
ERROR
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<m>
A numeric indicates how the mode handles the received data
0
Output the received data through UART directly. In the case, it probably includes
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
165 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
<id>
<sc>
<sid>
header at the beginning of a received data packet. Please refer to the commands.
AT+QIHEAD,AT+QISHOWRA, AT+QISHOWPT,AT+QISHOWLA
1
Output a notification statement “+QIRDI: <id>,<sc>,<sid>” through UART. This
statement will be displayed only one time until all the received data from the
connection (defined by <id>,<sc>,<sid>) have been retrieved by the command
AT+QIRD.
A numeric points out which context the connection for the received data is based on.
Please refer to the parameter <id> in the command AT+QIFGCNT. The range is 0-1.
A numeric points out the role of M66 in the connection for the received data.
1
The module serves as the client of the connection
2
The module serves as the server of the connection
A numeric indicates the index of the connection for the received data. The range is 0-5
When QIMUX was set as 0 by the command AT+QIMUX=0, this parameter will be always
0.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
11.31. AT+QIRD
AT+QIRD
Retrieve the Received TCP/IP Data
Retrieve the Received TCP/IP Data
Test Command
AT+QIRD=?
Response
+QIRD: (list of supported <id>s),(list of supported <sc>s),(list
of supported <sid>s),(list of supported <len>s)
OK
Write Command
AT+QIRD=<id>,<sc>,<sid>,<len>
Response
[+QIRD:
<ipAddr>:<port>,<type>,<length><CR><LF><data>]
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
Reference
Parameter
<id>
<sc>
<sid>
300ms
A numeric points out which context the connection for the received data is based on.
Please refer to the parameter <id> in the command AT+QIFGCNT. The range is 0-1
A numeric points out the role of M66 in the connection for the received data
1
The module serves as the client of the connection
2
The module serves as the server of the connection
A numeric indicates the index of the connection for the received data. The range is 0-5.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
166 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
<len>
<ipAddr>
<port>
<type>
<length>
<data>
When QIMUX was set as 0 by the command AT+QIMUX=0, this parameter will be always
0
The maximum length of data to be retrieved. The range is 1-1500
The address of the remote end. It is a dotted-decimal IP
The port of the remote end
An alpha string without quotation marks indicates the transport protocol type
TCP
the transport protocol is TCP
UDP
the transport protocol is UDP
The real length of the retrieved data
The retrieved data
NOTES
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
1. <id>, <sc> and <sid> are the same as the parameters in the statement “+QIRDI: <id>,<sc>,<sid>”.
2. If it replies only OK for the write command, it means there is no received data in the buffer of the
connection.
11.32. AT+QISDE
Control Whether or Not to Echo the Data for QISEND
AT+QISDE Control Whether or Not to Echo the Data for QISEND
Test Command
AT+QISDE=?
Response
+QISDE: (list of supported <m>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QISDE?
Response
+QISDE: <m>
OK
Write Command
AT+QISDE=<m>
Response
OK
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<m>
A numeric indicates whether or not to echo the data for AT+QISEND
0
Do not echo the data
1
Echo the data
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
167 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
11.33. AT+QPING
AT+QPING
Ping a Remote Server
Ping a Remote Server
Test Command
AT+QPING=?
Response
+QPING: "HOST",(list of supported <timeout>s),(list of
supported <pingnum>s)
OK
Write Command
AT+QPING=“<host>”[,[<timeout>][,<p
ingnum>]]
Response
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
[+QPING:
<result>[,<ipAddr>,<bytes>,<time>,<ttl>]<CR><LF>
…]<CR><LF>
+QPING:<finresult>[,<sent>,<rcvd>,<lost>,<min>,<max>,
<avg>]
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
Reference
Parameter
Depends on <timeout>.
The host address in string style. It could be a domain name or a dotted decimal IP address
A numeric gives the maximum time to wait for the response of each ping request. Unit:
second. Range: 1-255. Default: 1
<pingnum> A numeric indicates the maximum time of ping request. Range: 1-10. Default: 4
<result>
The result of each ping request
0
Received the ping response from the server. In the case, it is followed by
“,<ipAddr>,<bytes>,<time>,<ttl>”
1
Timeout for the ping request. In the case, no other information follows it
<ipAddr>
The IP address of the remote server. It is a dotted decimal IP
<bytes>
The length of sending each ping request
<time>
The time expended to wait for the response for the ping request. Unit: ms
<ttl>
The value of time to live of the response packet for the ping request
<finresult> The final result of the command
2
It is finished normally. It is successful to activate GPRS and find the host. In the
case, it is followed by “,<sent>,<rcvd>,<lost>,<min>,<max>,<avg>”
3
The TCP/IP stack is busy now. In the case, no other information follows it
4
Do NOT find the host. In the case, no other information follows it
5
Failed to activate PDP context. In the case, no other information follows it
<host>
<timeout>
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
168 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
<sent>
<rcvd>
<lost>
<min>
<max>
<avg>
Total number of sending the ping requests
Total number of the ping requests that received the response
Total number of the ping requests that were timeout
The minimum response time. Unit: ms
The maximum response time. Unit: ms
The average response time. Unit: ms
11.34. AT+QNTP Synchronize the Local Time Via NTP
AT+QNTP Synchronize the Local Time Via NTP
Test Command
AT+QNTP=?
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Response
+QNTP: “SERVER”,(list of supported <port>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QNTP?
Response
+QNTP: "<server>",<port>
OK
Execution Command
AT+QNTP
Response
OK
+QNTP: <result>
Write Command
AT+QNTP="<server>"[,<port>]
Response
OK
+QNTP: <result>
ERROR
Maximum Response Time
Reference
Parameter
<server>
<port>
<result>
120s, determined by network.
The address of the Time Server in string style. It could be a domain name or a dotted
decimal IP address
The port of the Time Server
The result of time synchronization
0
Successfully synchronize the local time
1
Failed to synchronize the local time because of unknown reason
2
Failed to receive the response from the Time Server
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
169 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
3
4
5
The TCP/IP stack is busy now
Do Not find the Time Server
Failed to activate PDP context
NOTE
The factory Time Server is the National Time Service Centre of China whose address is "210.72.145.44"
and port is 123.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
170 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
12
Supplementary Service Commands
12.1. AT+CCFC
AT+CCFC
Call Forwarding Number and Conditions Control
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Call Forwarding Number and Conditions Control
Test Command
AT+CCFC=?
Response
+CCFC: (list of supported <reads>s)
OK
Write Command
AT+CCFC=<reads>,<mode>[,<numbe
r>[,<type>[,<class>[,<subaddr>[,<sat
ype>[,time]]]]]]
Response
TA controls the call forwarding supplementary service.
Registration, erasure, activation, deactivation, and status
query are supported.
Only ,<reads> and <mode> should be entered with mode
(0-2,4)
If <mode><>2 and command successful:
OK
If <mode>=2 and command successful (only in connection
with <reads> 0 –3)
For registered call forwarding numbers:
+CCFC: <status>, <class1>[, <number>, <type>
[,<subaddr>,<satype>[,<time>]]] [<CR><LF>+CCFC: ....]
OK
If no call forwarding numbers are registered (and therefore all
classes are inactive):
+CCFC: <status>, <class>
OK
where <status>=0 and <class>=15
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
171 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
0
Unconditional
1
Mobile busy
2
No reply
3
Not reachable
4
All call forwarding (0-3)
5
All conditional call forwarding (1-3)
<mode>
0
Disable
1
Enable
2
Query status
3
Registration
4
Erasure
<number> Phone number in string type of forwarding address in format specified by <type>
<type>
Type of address in integer format; default value is 145 when dialing string includes
international access code character “+”, otherwise 129
<subaddr> String type sub-address of format specified by <satype>
<satype>
Type of sub-address in integer
<class>
1
Voice
2
Data
4
FAX
7
All telephony except SMS
8
Short message service
16
Data circuit sync
32
Data circuit async
<time>
1…30 When “no reply” (<reads>=no reply) is enabled or queried, this gives the time in
seconds to wait before call is forwarded, default value is 20
<status>
0
Not active
1
Active
<reads>
Example
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
AT+CCFC=0,3,”15021012496”
OK
AT+CCFC=0,2
+CCFC: 1,1,"+8615021012496",145
//Register the destination number for unconditional call
forwarding (CFU)
//Query the status of CFU without specifying <class>
+CCFC: 1,4,"+8615021012496",145
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
172 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
+CCFC: 1,32,"+8615021012496",145
+CCFC: 1,16,"+8615021012496",145
OK
AT+CCFC=0,4
OK
AT+CCFC=0,2
+CCFC: 0,7
//Erase the registered CFU destination number
//Query the status, no destination number
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
12.2. AT+CCUG
AT+CCUG
Closed User Group Control
Closed User Group Control
Test Command
AT+CCUG=?
Read Command
AT+CCUG?
Response
OK
Response
+CCUG: <n>,<index>,<info>
OK
Write Command
AT+CCUG=[<n>][,<index>[,<info>]]
Response
TA sets the closed user group supplementary service
parameters as a default adjustment for all following calls.
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
300ms
Parameter
<n>
<index>
<info>
0
1
0...9
10
0
1
Disable CUG
Enable CUG
CUG index
No index (preferred CUG taken from subscriber data)
Bo information
Suppress OA (Outgoing Access)
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
173 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
2
3
Suppress preferential CUG
Suppress OA and preferential CUG
12.3. AT+CCWA Call Waiting Control
AT+CCWA Call Waiting Control
Test Command
AT+CCWA=?
Response
+CCWA: (list of supported <n>s)
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
OK
Read Command
AT+CCWA?
Response
+CCWA: <n>
OK
Write Command
AT+CCWA=[<n>][,<mode>[,<class>]]
Response
TA controls the call waiting supplementary service. Activation,
deactivation and status query are supported.
If <mode><>2 and command successful:
OK
If <mode>=2 and command successful:
+CCWA:<status>,<class1>[<CR><LF>+CCWA:<status>,<
class2>[...]]
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<n>
<mode>
300ms
0
Disable presentation of an unsolicited result code
1
Enable presentation of an unsolicited result code
When <mode> parameter is not given, network is not interrogated
0
Disable
1
Enable
2
Query status
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
174 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
<class>
<status>
A sum of integers, each integer represents a class of information
1
Voice (telephony)
2
Data (bearer service)
4
FAX(facsimile)
16
Data circuit sync
32
Data circuit async
0
Disable
1
Enable
NOTES
1. <status>=0 should be returned only if service is not active for any <class> i.e. +CCWA: 0, 7 will be
returned in this case.
2. When <mode>=2, all active call waiting classes will be reported. In this mode the command is
available by pressing any key.
3. Unsolicited result code
When the presentation call waiting at the TA is enabled (and call waiting is enabled) and a terminating
call set up during an established call, an unsolicited result code is returned:
+CCWA: <number>,<type>,<class>[,<alpha>]
Parameters
<number> Phone number in string type of calling address in format specified by <type>
<type>
Type of address octet in integer format
129
Unknown type (IDSN format number)
145
International number type (ISDN format )
<alpha>
Optional string type alphanumeric representation of <number> corresponding to the
entry found in phone book
Example
AT+CCWA=1,1
OK
ATD10086;
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
//Enable presentation of an unsolicited result code
//Establish a call
//Indication of a call that has been waiting
+CCWA: "02154450293",129,1
12.4. AT+CHLD
AT+CHLD
Call Hold and Multiparty
Call Hold and Multiparty
Test Command
AT+CHLD=?
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
+CHLD: (list of supported <n>s)
Confidential / Released
175 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
OK
Write Command
AT+CHLD=[<n>]
Response
TA controls the supplementary services call hold, multiparty
and explicit call transfer. Calls can be put on hold, recovered,
released, added to conversation and transferred.
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<n>
0
1
1X
2
2X
3
NOTE
300ms
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Terminate all held calls or UDUB (User Determined User Busy) for a waiting call. If
a call is waiting, terminate the waiting call. Otherwise, terminate all held calls (if
any)
Terminate all active calls (if any) and accept the other call (waiting call or held
call). It cannot terminate active call if there is only one call
Terminate the specific call number X (X=1-7)( active, waiting or held)
Place all active calls on hold (if any) and accept the other call (waiting call or held
call) as the active call
Place all active calls except call X (X=1-7) on hold
Add the held call to the active calls
These supplementary services are only available to the teleservice 11 (Speech: Telephony).
Example
ATD10086;
OK
+CCWA: "02154450293",129,1
AT+CHLD=2
OK
AT+CLCC
+CLCC: 1,0,1,0,0,"10086",129,""
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
//Establish a call
//Indication of a call that has been waiting
//Place the active call on hold and accept the waiting call as
the active call
//The first call on hold
Confidential / Released
176 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
+CLCC: 2,1,0,0,0,"02154450293",129,""
OK
AT+CHLD=21
OK
AT+CLCC
+CLCC: 1,0,0,0,0,"10086",129,""
+CLCC: 2,1,1,0,1,"02154450293",129,""
OK
AT+CHLD=3
//The second call becomes active
//Place the active call except call X=1 on hold
//The first call becomes active
//The second call on hold
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
//Add a held call to the active calls in order to set up a
conference (multiparty) call
OK
AT+CLCC
+CLCC: 1,0,0,0,1,"10086",129,""
+CLCC: 2,1,0,0,1,"02154450293",129,""
OK
12.5. AT+CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation
AT+CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation
Test Command
AT+CLIP=?
Response
+CLIP: (list of supported <n>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CLIP?
Response
+CLIP: <n>,<m>
OK
Write Command
AT+CLIP=[<n>]
Response
TA enables or disables the presentation of the calling line
identity (CLI) at the TE. It has no effect on the execution of the
supplementary service CLIP in the network.
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
177 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Maximum Response Time
15s, determined by network.
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<n>
<m>
NOTE
0
1
0
1
2
Suppress unsolicited result codes
Display unsolicited result codes
CLIP not provisioned
CLIP provisioned
Unknown
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Unsolicited result code
When the presentation of the CLI at the TE is enabled (and calling subscriber allows), an unsolicited
result code is returned after every RING (or +CRING: <type>) at a mobile terminating call.
+CLIP: <number>, <type>,"",,<alphaId>,<CLI validity>
Parameters
<number>
Phone number in string type of calling address in format specified by <type>
<type>
Type of address octet in integer format;
129
Unknown type (IDSN format number)
145
International number type (ISDN format )
<alphaId>
String type alphanumeric representation of <number> corresponding to the entry found
in phone book
<CLI validity> 0
CLI valid
1
CLI has been withheld by the originator
2
CLI is not available due to interworking problems or limitations of originating
network
Example
AT+CPBW=1,"02151082965",129,"QUECTEL"
OK
AT+CLIP=1
OK
RING
+CLIP: "02151082965",129,"",,"",0
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
178 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
12.6. AT+QCLIP Control Whether or Not to Show the Name of Incoming
Call Number
AT+QCLIP
Control Whether or Not to Show the Name of Incoming Call Number
Test Command
AT+QCLIP=?
Response
+QCLIP: (list of supported <n>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QCLIP?
Response
+QCLIP: <n>
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
OK
Write Command
AT+QCLIP=<n>
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
Parameter
<n>
NOTE
300ms
Enable or disable the function of show the name of incoming call number
0
Enable
1
Disable
This AT command should be used in conjunction with CLIP command.
Example
AT+CPBW=1,"02151082965",129,"QUECTEL"
OK
AT+QCLIP=1
OK
AT+CLIP=1
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
179 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
RING
+CLIP: "02151082965",129,"",,"QUECTEL",0
12.7. AT+CLIR
Calling Line Identification Restriction
AT+CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction
Test Command
AT+CLIR=?
Response
+CLIR: (list of supported <n>s)
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
OK
Read Command
AT+CLIR?
Response
+CLIR: <n>,<m>
OK
Write Command
AT+CLIR=[<n>]
Response
TA restricts or enables the presentation of the calling line
identity (CLI) to the called party when originating a call.
The command overrides the CLIR subscription (default is
restricted or allowed) when temporary mode is provisioned as
a default adjustment for all following outgoing calls. This
adjustment can be revoked by using the opposite Command.
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<n>
<m>
15s, determined by network
(Parameter sets the adjustment for outgoing calls)
0
presentation indicator is used according to the subscription of the CLIR service
1
CLIR invocation
2
CLIR suppression
(Parameter shows the subscriber CLIR service status in the network)
0
CLIR not provisioned
1
CLIR provisioned in permanent mode
2
Unknown (e.g. no network, etc.)
3
CLIR temporary mode presentation restricted
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
180 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
4
CLIR temporary mode presentation allowed
12.8. AT+COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation
AT+COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation
Test Command
AT+COLP=?
Response
+COLP: (list of supported <n>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+COLP?
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Response
+COLP: <n>,<m>
OK
Write Command
AT+COLP=[<n>]
Response
TA enables or disables the presentation of the COL
(Connected Line) at the TE for a mobile originating a call. It
has no effect on the execution of the supplementary service
COLR in the network.
Intermediate result code is returned from TA to TE before any
+CR or V.25ter responses.
OK
Maximum Response Time
15s, determined by network.
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<n>
<m>
(Parameter sets/shows the result code presentation status in the TA)
0
Disable
1
Enable
(Parameter shows the subscriber COLP service status in the network)
0
COLP not provisioned
1
COLP provisioned
2
Unknown (e.g. no network, etc.)
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
181 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
NOTE
Intermediate result code
When enabled (and called subscriber allows), an intermediate result code is returned before any +CR or
V.25ter responses:
+COLP: <number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype> [,<alpha>]]
Parameters
<number> Phone number in string type, format specified by <type>
<type>
Type of address octet in integer format
129 Unknown type (IDSN format number)
145 International number type (ISDN format )
<subaddr> String type sub-address of format specified by <satype>
<satype>
Type of sub-address octet in integer format (refer to GSM 04.08 sub clause 10.5.4.8)
<alpha>
Optional string type alphanumeric representation of <number> corresponding to the entry
found in phone book
Example
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
AT+CPBW=1,"02151082965",129,"QUECTEL"
OK
AT+COLP=1
OK
ATD02151082965;
+COLP: "02151082965",129,"",0,""
OK
12.9. AT+QCOLP Show Alpha Field in +COLP String
AT+QCOLP Show Alpha Field in +COLP String
Test Command
AT+QCOLP=?
Response
+QCOLP: (list of supported <mode>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QCOLP?
Response
+QCOLP: <mode>
OK
Write Command
AT+QCOLP=<mode>
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
OK
Confidential / Released
182 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<mode>
Whether or not to show alpha field in +COLP string
0
NOT show alpha field in +COLP string
1
Show alpha field in +COLP string
NOTE
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
This command setting only works under AT+COLP=1.
Example
AT+CPBW=1,"02151082965",129,"QUECTEL"
OK
AT+QCOLP=1
OK
AT+COLP=1
OK
ATD02151082965;
+COLP: "02151082965",129,"",0,"QUECTEL"
OK
12.10. AT+CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data
AT+CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data
Test Command
AT+CUSD=?
Response
+CUSD: (list of supported <n>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CUSD?
Response
+CUSD: <n>
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
183 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Write Command
AT+CUSD=[<n>[,<str>[,<dcs>]]
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
120s, determined by network.
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
A numeric parameter which indicates control of the unstructured supplementary service data
0
Disable the result code presentation in the TA
1
Enable the result code presentation in the TA
2
Cancel session (not applicable to read command response)
<str> String type USSD-string
<dcs> Cell Broadcast Data Coding Scheme in integer format (default 0)
<n>
Example
AT+CSCS=“UCS2”
OK
AT+CUSD=1,"002A0031003000300023"
+CUSD:
1,"0031002E59296C14000A0032002E65B095FB000A0033002E8BC15238000A0034002E5F6979680
00A0035002E751F6D3B000A0036002E5A314E50000A0037002E5E385DDE98CE91C7000A002A002
E900051FA000A", 72
OK
12.11. AT+CSSN
Supplementary Services Notification
AT+CSSN Supplementary Services Notification
Test Command
AT+CSSN=?
Response
+CSSN: (list of supported <n>s), (list of supported <m>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CSSN?
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
+CSSN: <n>,<m>
Confidential / Released
184 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
OK
Write Command
AT+CSSN=[<n>[,<m>]]
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<n>
<m>
<code1>
<index>
<code2>
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
A numeric parameter which indicates whether to show the +CSSI:<code1>[,<index>]
result code presentation status after a mobile originated call setup
0
Disable
1
Enable
A numeric parameter which indicates whether to show the +CSSU:<code2> result code
presentation status during a mobile terminated call setup or during a call, or when a
forward check supplementary service notification is received
0
Disable
1
Enable
0
Unconditional call forwarding is active
1
Some of the conditional call forwarding are active
2
Call has been forwarded
3
Call is waiting
4
This is a CUG call (also <index> present)
5
Outgoing calls are barred
6
Incoming calls are barred
7
CLIR suppression rejected
Closed user group index
0
This is a forwarded call
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
185 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
13
Audio Commands
13.1. ATL Set Monitor Speaker Loudness
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
ATL Set Monitor Speaker Loudness
Execution Command
ATL<value>
Response
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
V.25ter
Parameter
<value>
0
1
2
3
NOTE
Low speaker volume
Low speaker volume
Medium speaker volume
High speaker volume
The two commands ATL and ATM are implemented only for V.25 compatibility reasons and have no
effect.
13.2. ATM
ATM
Set Monitor Speaker Mode
Set Monitor Speaker Mode
Execution Command
ATM<value>
Response
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
V.25ter
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
186 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Parameter
0
1
2
<value>
Speaker is always off
Speaker is on until TA inform TE that carrier has been detected
Speaker is always on when TA is off-hook
NOTE
The two commands ATL and ATM are implemented only for V.25 compatibility reasons and have no
effect.
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
13.3. AT+VTD
AT+VTD
Tone Duration
Tone Duration
Test Command
AT+VTD=?
Response
+VTD: ( list of supported <internalduration>s )[,( list of
supported <duration>s )]
OK
Read Command
AT+VTD?
Response
+VTD: <internalduration>,<duration>
OK
Write Command
AT+VTD=<internalduration>[,<duratio
n>]
Response
This command refers to an integer <internalduration> that
defines the length of tones emitted as a result of the +VTS
command. This does not affect the D command.
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<internalduration>
<duration>
1-255
0
1-100000
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Duration between two tones, unit is 100ms
Do not set duration of every single tone.
Duration of every single tone , unit is 1ms
Confidential / Released
187 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
13.4. AT+VTS
AT+VTS
DTMF and Tone Generation
DTMF and Tone Generation
Test Command
AT+VTS=?
Response
+VTS: (list of supported <dtmf>s), ,(list of supported
<duration>s)
OK
Write Command
AT+VTS=<dtmf-string>
Response
This command allows the transmission of DTMF tones and
arbitrary tones in voice mode. These tones may be used (for
example) when announcing the start of a recording period.
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<dtmf-string>
<duration>
Example
Depends on the length of <dtmf-string>.
It has a max length of 20 characters, must be entered between double quotes (" ") and
consists of combinations of the following separated by commas. But a single character
does not require quotes
1) <dtmf>
A single ASCII characters in the set 0-9, #,*, A-D. This is
interpreted as a sequence of DTMF tones whose duration
is set by the +VTD command
2) {<dtmf>, <duration>} This is interpreted as a DTMF tone whose duration is
determined by <duration>
Duration of the tone, unit: 100ms, range: 1-255
ATD10086;
OK
AT+VTS=1
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
//Establish a call
//Send a single DTMF tone according to the prompts of voice
Confidential / Released
188 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
13.5. AT+CALM
AT+CALM
Alert Sound Mode
Alert Sound Mode
Test Command
AT+CALM=?
Response
+CALM: (list of supported <mode>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CALM?
Response
+CALM: <mode>
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Write Command
AT+CALM=<mode>
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<mode>
0
1
300ms
Normal mode
Silent mode (all sounds from ME are prevented)
13.6. AT+CRSL Ringer Sound Level
AT+CRSL Ringer Sound Level
Test Command
AT+CRSL=?
Response
+CRSL: (list of supported <level>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CRSL?
Response
+CRSL: <level>
OK
Write Command
AT+CRSL=<level>
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
OK
Confidential / Released
189 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<level>
Integer type value (0-100) with manufacturer specific range (Smallest value represents the
lowest sound level)
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
13.7. AT+CLVL Loud Speaker Volume Level
AT+CLVL Loud Speaker Volume Level
Test Command
AT+CLVL=?
Response
+CLVL: (list of supported <level>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CLVL?
Response
+CLVL: <level>
OK
Write Command
AT+CLVL=<level>
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<level>
300ms
Integer type value (0-100) with manufacturer specific range (Smallest value represents
the lowest sound level)
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
190 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
13.8. AT+CMUT
AT+CMUT
Mute Control
Mute Control
Test Command
AT+CMUT=?
Response
+CMUT: (list of supported <n>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+CMUT?
Response
+CMUT: <n>
OK
Write Command
AT+CMUT=<n>
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<n>
0
1
Mute off
Mute on
13.9. AT+QSIDET
AT+QSIDET
Test Command
AT+QSIDET=?
300ms
Change the Side Tone Gain Level
Change the Side Tone Gain Level
Response
+QSIDET: (list of supported <gainlevel>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QSIDET?
Response
+QSIDET(NORMAL_AUDIO): <gainlevel>
OK
+QSIDET(HEADSET_AUDIO): <gainlevel>
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
191 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Write Command
AT+QSIDET=<gainlevel>
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Range is 0-255
<gainlevel>
NOTE
<gainlevel> value is related to specific channel.
13.10. AT+QMIC
AT+QMIC
Change the Microphone Gain Level
Change the Microphone Gain Level
Test Command
AT+QMIC=?
Response
+QMIC: (list of supported <channel>s）, (list of supported
<gainlevel>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QMIC?
Response
+QMIC:
<gainlevel(Normal_Mic)>,<gainlevel(Headset_Mic)>,<gai
nlevel(Loudspeaker_Mic)>
OK
Write Command
AT+QMIC=<channel>,<gainlevel>
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
192 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Parameter
0
Normal microphone
1
Headset microphone
2
Loudspeaker microphone
<gainlevel> Range is 0-15
<channel>
13.11. AT+QLDTMF Generate Local DTMF Tones
AT+QLDTMF Generate Local DTMF Tones
Test Command
AT+QLDTMF=?
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Response
+QLDTMF: (list of
<DTMF-string>s)
supported <n>s）, (list of
supported
OK
Write Command
AT+QLDTMF=<n>[,<DTMF string>]
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Execution Command
AT+QLDTMF
Response
OK
Maximum Response Time
Depends on the length of <DTMF string>.
Reference
Parameter
A numeric parameter(1-1000) which indicates the duration of all DTMF tones in
<DTMF -string> in 1/10 seconds
<DTMF-string> A string parameter which has a max length of 20 DTMF characters (single ASCII chars
in the set 0-9,#,*,A-D), separated by commas
<n>
NOTE
Aborts any DTMF tones that are generated currently and any DTMF tones sequence.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
193 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
13.12. AT+QAUDCH
AT+QAUDCH
Swap the Audio Channels
Swap the Audio Channels
Test Command
AT+QAUDCH=?
Response
+QAUDCH: (list of supported <n>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QAUDCH?
Response
+QAUDCH: <n>
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Write Command
AT+QAUDCH=[<n>]
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
Parameter
<n>
0
1
2
300ms
Normal audio channel (default)
Headset audio channel
Loudspeaker audio
13.13. AT+QAUDLOOP Audio Channel Loop Back Test
AT+QAUDLOOP
Audio Channel Loop Back Test
Test Command
AT+QAUDLOOP=?
Response
+QAUDLOOP: (list of supported <state>s),(list of supported
<type>s)
OK
Write Command
AT+QAUDLOOP=<state>[,<type>]
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
194 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<state>
<type>
0
1
0
1
2
Test is off
Test is on
Normal audio channel
Headset audio channel
Loudspeaker audio channel
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
13.14. AT+QLTONE
AT+QLTONE
Test Command
AT+QLTONE=?
Generate Local Specific Tone
Generate Local Specific Tone
Response
+QLTONE: (list of supported <mode>s), (list of supported
<frequency>s), (list of supported <periodOn>s), (list of
supported <periodOff>s), (list of supported <duration>s)
OK
Write Command
AT+QLTONE=<mode>,<frequency>,<
periodOn>,<periodOff>,<duration>
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
Parameter
Depends on the content of the play.
0
Stop playing tone
1
Start playing tone
<frequency> The frequency of tone to be generated
<periodOn> The period of generating tone
<periodOff> The period of stopping tone
<duration> Duration of tones in milliseconds
<mode>
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
195 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
NOTE
When playing tone, module will continuously play for <periodOn>, then stop playing for <periodOff> in a
cycle. The total time of cycles is <duration>.
13.15. AT+QTONEP Set DTMF Output Path
AT+QTONEP Set DTMF Output Path
Test Command
AT+QTONEP=?
Response
+QTONEP: (list of supported <outputpath>s)
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
OK
Read Command
AT+QTONEP?
Response
+QTONEP: <outputpath>
OK
Write Command
AT+QTONEP=<outputpath>
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
Parameter
<outputpath>
300ms
Output path
0
Output DTMF or tone from Normal speaker
1
Output DTMF or tone from Headset speaker
2
Output DTMF or tone from Loud speaker
3
Auto
NOTE
Set AT+QTONEP=3, output DTMF or tone from default speak path. For more details, consult
AT+QAUDCH.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
196 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
13.16. AT+QTDMOD Set Tone Detection Mode
AT+QTDMOD Set Tone Detection Mode
Test Command
AT+QTDMOD=?
Response
+QTDMOD: (list of supported <operatefuntion>s),(list of
supported <funtionstatus>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QTDMOD?
Response
+QTDMOD: <operatefuntion>,<funtionstatus>
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
OK
Write Command
AT+QTDMOD=<operatefuntion>,<funt
ionstatus>
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
Parameter
300ms
<operatefuntion>Operate function
1
Set detection range
2
Set detection mode
<funtionstatus> Function status
0
When set <operatefuntion>=1, detect all DTMF, including 1400Hz and
2300Hz handshake signal. When set <operatefuntion>=2, detect DTMF
tone by normal arithmetic
1
When set <operatefuntion>=1, only detect 1400Hz and 2300Hz handshake
signal by using optimal arithmetic. When set <operatefuntion>=2, detect
long continuous DTMF tone by using optimal arithmetic
NOTES
1. Set AT+QTDMOD=1,0, detect all DTMF, including 1400Hz and 2300Hz handshake signal.
2. Set AT+QTDMOD=1,1, only detect 1400Hz and 2300Hz handshake signal by using optimal
arithmetic.
3. Set AT+QTDMOD=2,0, detect DTMF tone by using normal arithmetic.
4. Set AT+QTDMOD=2,1, detect long continuous DTMF tone by using optimal arithmetic.
5. Consult AT+QTONEDET.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
197 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
13.17. AT+QTONEDET
AT+QTONEDET
Detect DTMF
Detect DTMF
Test Command
AT+QTONEDET=?
Response
+QTONEDET: (list of supported <mode>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QTONEDET?
Response
+QTONEDET: <mode>
OK
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Write Command
AT+QTONEDET=<mode>[,<operate >]
[,<prefixpause>][,<lowthreshold>][,<h
ighthreshold>]
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Open after successful DTMF tone is detected, report:
+QTONEDET: <dtmfcode>[,< persistencetime>]
Maximum Response Time
Reference
Parameter
<mode>
<operate>
300ms
Mode function
0
Close tone detection
1
Open tone detection
2
Configure 1400Hz or 2300Hz detection threshold, duration of which is 100ms
3
Configure 1400Hz and 2300Hz 400ms detection threshold
4
Configure DTMF detection threshold
5
Open debug
Operate value
When <mode>=2, <operate> set as follows
0
Query threshold values, these values are 1400Hz and 2300Hz detection
threshold, each duration of which is 100ms
1
Set threshold values, these values are 1400Hz and 2300Hz 100ms detection
threshold
When <mode>=3, <operate> set as follows
0
Query threshold values, these values are 1400Hz and 2300Hz 400ms detect
threshold
1
Set threshold values, these values are 1400Hz and 2300Hz 400ms detect
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
198 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
threshold.
When <mode>=4, <operate> set as follows
0
Query threshold values, these values are detection threshold
1
Set threshold values, these values are DTMF detection threshold
When <mode>=5, <param1> set as follows
0
Working status, default value, report +QTONEDET: x,x, please refer to Note3
1
Debug status, only report +QTONEDTD:x,x,… debug information (refer to
Note 2)
2
Debug status and working status, report +QTONEDTD: x,x,… debug
information (refer to Note 2) and +QTONEDET:x,x, please refer to Note 3
<prefixpause> Prefix pause number
<lowthreshold> Low threshold value
<highthreshold> High threshold value
<dtmfcode>
DTMF tone code corresponding ASSCII
48
DTMF 0
49
DTMF 1
50
DTMF 2
51
DTMF 3
52
DTMF 4
53
DTMF 5
54
DTMF 6
55
DTMF 7
56
DTMF 8
57
DTMF 9
65
DTMF A
66
DTMF B
67
DTMF C
68
DTMF D
42
DTMF *
35
DTMF #
69
1400Hz frequency
70
2300Hz frequency
<persistencetime>
100
100ms of the tone is detected, only 1400Hz and 2300 Hz
400
400ms of the tone is detected, only 1400Hz and 2300 Hz
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
NOTES
1. Available during voice call.
2. If the duration of DTMF tone is within the value range of low and high threshold value, it is effective.
Unit is 20ms.
3. When in debug mode, report +QTONEDTD: <dtmfcode>,<weak>,<strong>,<pause_f7>,
<pause_dtmf>,<pause_unkown>,<framecnt>.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
199 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
4. When report as follows:
+QTONEDET: 50
+QTONEDET: 69,100
+QTONEDET: 70,100
+QTONEDET: 69,400
+QTONEDET: 70,400
5. Consult AT+QTDMOD.
13.18. AT+QWDTMF
AT+QWDTMF
Detected DTMF 2
Detected 100ms of 1400Hz
Detected 100ms of 2300Hz
Detected 400ms of 1400Hz
Detected 400ms of 2300Hz
Play DTMF Tone During the Call
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Play DTMF Tone During the Call
Test Command
AT+QWDTMF=?
Response
+QWDTMF: (list of supported <ul_volume>s),(list of
supported<dl_volume>s),(“<dtmfcode>,<continuancetime
>,<mutetime>”),(list of supported <channel>s),(list of
supported <mode>s)
OK
Write Command
AT+QWDTMF=<ul_volume>,<dl_volu
me>,(“<dtmfcode>,<continuancetime
>,<mutetime>”)[,<channel>][,<mode>
]
Response
If success is related to ME functionality:
+QWDTMF: 5
OK
If fail is related to ME functionality:
+QWDTMF: <playcode>
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
Depends on the content of the play.
Parameter
<ul_volume>
<dl_volume>
<dtmfcode>
0-7, uplink channel of the volume
0-7, downlink channel of the volume, recommended to be set as 0
The DTMF tone strings
'0'
DTMF 0
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
200 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
'1'
DTMF 1
'2'
DTMF 2
'3'
DTMF 3
'4'
DTMF 4
'5'
DTMF 5
'6'
DTMF 6
'7'
DTMF 7
'8'
DTMF 8
'9'
DTMF 9
'A'
DTMF A
'B'
DTMF B
'C'
DTMF C
'D'
DTMF D
'*'
DTMF *
'#'
DTMF #
‘E’
Frequency of 1400Hz
‘F’
Frequency of 2300Hz
‘G’
Frequency of 1KHz
<continuancetime> Duration of each DTMF tone, unit is ms
<mutetime>
Mute time, unit is ms
<channel>
0
Normal audio channel
1
Headset audio channel
2
Loudspeaker audio
<mode>
0
Algorithm 1 (Default)
1
Algorithm 2
<playcode>
Indicate status of sending DTMF
If <playcode> is 5, it means sending DTMF successfully
If <playcode> is not 5, it means sending DTMF unsuccessfully
NOTES
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
1. AT+QWDTMF=7,0,“0A5,50,50,1,55,50,23,100,50”
Send DTMF ‘0’ for 50ms, mute 50ms; send DTMF ‘A’ for 50ms, mute 50ms; send DTMF ‘5’ for 50ms,
mute 50ms; send DTMF ‘1’ for 55ms, mute 50ms; send DTMF ‘2’ for 100ms, mute 50ms; send
DTMF ‘3’ for 100ms, mute 50ms.
2. <channel> is available for non-call.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
201 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
14
Hardware Related Commands
14.1. AT+CCLK
AT+CCLK
Clock
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Clock
Test Command
AT+CCLK=?
Read Command
AT+CCLK?
Response
OK
Response
+CCLK: <time>
OK
Write Command
AT+CCLK=<time>
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<time>
300ms
String type value; format is "yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz", where characters indicate year (two
last digits),month, day, hour, minutes, seconds and time zone (indicates the difference,
expressed in quarters of an hour, between the local time and GMT; range -47...+48). E.g.
May 6th, 1994, 22:10:00 GMT+2 hours equals to "94/05/06,22:10:00+08"
Example
AT+CCLK?
+CCLK: "08/01/04, 00:19:43+00"
//Query the local time
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
202 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
14.2. AT+QALARM
AT+QALARM
Set Alarm
Set Alarm
Test Command
AT+QALARM=?
Response
+QALARM: (list of supported <state>s),<time>,(list of
supported <repeat>s),(list of supported <power>s)
OK
Write Command
AT+QALARM=<state>,<time>,<repeat
>,<power>
Response
OK
ERROR
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<state>
<time>
<repeat>
<power>
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
An integer parameter which indicates whether or not to enable alarm
0
Clear alarm
1
Set alarm
A string parameter which indicates the time when an alarm arises. The format is
“yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss+-zz” where characters indicate the last two digits of year, month, day,
hour, minute, second and time zone. The time zone is expressed in quarters of an hour
between the local time and GMT, ranging from -47 to +48
An integer parameter which indicates the repeat mode
0
None
1
Daily
2
Weekly
3
Monthly
An integer parameter which indicates the method of controlling power when alarm arises
0
None. Only send “ALARM RING” to serial port
1
Alarm power off. Send “ALARM RING” to serial port and power off in 5 seconds
2
Alarm power on. Send “ALARM MODE” to serial port and enter into alarm mode
NOTE
In alarm mode, protocol stack and SIM protocol are closed, only a few AT command can be executed, and
system will be powered down after 90 seconds, if neither power key is pressed nor functionality is
changed to full functionality. If power key is pressed, system will be powered down right now.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
203 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
14.3. AT+CBC
AT+CBC
Battery Charge
Battery Charge
Test Command
AT+CBC=?
Response
+CBC: (list of supported
<bcl>s),(voltage)
<bcs>s),(list
of
supported
OK
Execution Command
AT+CBC
Response
+CBC: <bcs>, <bcl>,<voltage>
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
Reference
GSM 07.07
Parameter
<bcs>
<bcl>
<voltage>
300ms
Charge status
0
ME is not charging
1
ME is charging
2
Charging has finished
Battery connection level
0...100
Battery has 0-100 percent of capacity remaining vent
Battery voltage (mV)
14.4. AT+QSCLK
AT+QSCLK
Configure Slow Clock
Configure Slow Clock
Test Command
AT+QSCLK=?
Response
+QSCLK: (list of supported <n>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QSCLK?
Response
+QSCLK: <n>
OK
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
204 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
Write Command
AT+QSCLK=<n>
Response
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<n>
0
1
Disable slow clock
Enable slow clock, it is controlled by DTR
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
14.5. AT+QLEDMODE Configure the Network LED Patterns
AT+QLEDMODE
Configure the Network LED Patterns
Test Command
AT+QLEDMODE=?
Response
+QLEDMODE: (list of supported <ledmode>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QLEDMODE?
Response
+QLEDMODE: <ledmode>
OK
Write Command
AT+QLEDMODE=<ledmode>
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<ledmode>
0
1
2
Network LED flashes rapidly when a call is ringing
No effect on the Network LED when a call is ringing
No effect on the Network LED when a call is ringing, and RI will not change
when URC reported until the ringing ends
NOTE
Please restart the module after the command is set.
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
205 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
15
Others Commands
15.1. A/
Re-issues the Last Command Given
A/
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Re-issues the Last Command Given
Execution Command
A/
Response
Re-issues the previous command
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
V.25ter
NOTE
This command does not work when the serial multiplexer is active. It does not have to end with
terminating character.
Example
AT
OK
A/
OK
//Re-issues the previous command
15.2. ATE
ATE
Set Command Echo Mode
Set Command Echo Mode
Execution Command
ATE[<value>]
Response
This setting determines whether or not the TA echoes
characters received from TE during command state.
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
206 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
V.25ter
Parameter
0
1
<value>
15.3. ATS3
ATS3
Echo mode off
Echo mode on
Set Command Line Termination Character
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Set Command Line Termination Character
Read Command
ATS3?
Response
<n>
OK
Write Command
ATS3=<n>
Response
This parameter setting determines the character recognized
by TA to terminate an incoming command line. The TA also
returns this character in output.
OK
Maximum Response Time
Reference
V.25ter
Parameter
<n>
0-13-127
15.4. ATS4
ATS4
300ms
Command line termination character (Default 13=<CR>)
Set Response Formatting Character
Set Response Formatting Character
Read Command
ATS4?
Response
<n>
OK
Write Command
ATS4=<n>
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
This parameter setting determines the character generated
Confidential / Released
207 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
by the TA for result code and information text.
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
V.25ter
Parameter
0-10-127
<n>
15.5. ATS5
ATS5
Response formatting character (Default 10=<LF>)
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Set Command Line Editing Character
Set Command Line Editing Character
Read Command
ATS5?
Response
<n>
OK
Write Command
ATS5=<n>
Response
This parameter setting determines the character recognized
by TA as a request to delete the immediately preceding
character from the command line.
OK
Maximum Response Time
Reference
V.25ter
Parameter
<n>
0-8-127
15.6. AT+DS
AT+DS
300ms
Response editing character (Default 8=<Backspace>)
V.42bis Data Compression Control
V.42bis Data Compression Control
Test Command
AT+DS=?
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
+DS: (list of supported <p0>s), (list of supported <n>s), (list
of supported <p1>s), (list of supported <p2>s)
Confidential / Released
208 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
OK
Read Command
AT+DS?
Response
+DS: <p0>,<n>,<p1>,<p2>
OK
Write Command
AT+DS=[<p0>[,<n>[,<p1>[,<p2>]]]]
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Maximum Response Time
Reference
V.25ter
Parameter
<p0>
<n>
<p1>
<p2>
0
0
1
512-4096
6-250
NOTES
Response
This parameter setting determines the possible data
compression mode by TA at the compression negotiation with
the remote TA after a call set up.
OK
300ms
NONE
Allow negotiation of <p0> down
Do not allow negotiation of <p0> - disconnect on difference
Dictionary size
Maximum string size (Default value is 6)
1. This command is only for data call.
2. GSM transmits the data transparently. The remote TA may support this compression.
3. This command must be used in conjunction with command AT+CRLP to enable compression
(AT+CRLP=X,X,X,X,1,X).
15.7. AT+DR
V.42bis Data Compression Reporting Control
AT+DR V.42bis Data Compression Reporting Control
Test Command
AT+DR=?
Response
+DR: (list of supported <value>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+DR?
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Response
+DR: <value>
Confidential / Released
209 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
OK
Write Command
AT+DR=[<value>]
Response
This parameter setting determines whether or not
intermediate result code of the current data compressing is
reported by TA to TE after a connection is established.
OK
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
V.25ter
Parameter
<value>
0
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Reporting disabled
15.8. AT+QRIMODE
AT+QRIMODE
Set RI Time
Set RI Time
Test Command
AT+QRIMODE=?
Response
+QRIMODE: (list of supported <timemode>s)
OK
Read Command
AT+QRIMODE?
Response
+QRIMODE: <timemode>
OK
Write Command
AT+QRIMODE=<timemode>
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Maximum Response Time
300ms
Reference
Parameter
<timemode>
Time mode
0
Receive SMS, RI 120ms low pulse, other URC RI 120ms low pulse
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
210 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
1
2
Receive SMS, RI 120ms low pulse, other URC RI 50ms low pulse
When a SMS is received, RI changes to LOW and holds low level for 120ms,
other URC RI take no effect
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
211 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
16
Appendix
16.1. Related Documents
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Table 4: Related Documents
SN
Document Name
Remark
[1]
V.25ter
Serial asynchronous automatic dialing and control
GSM 07.07
Digital cellular telecommunications (Phase 2+); AT
command set for GSM Mobile Equipment (ME)
[3]
GSM 07.05
Use of Data Terminal Equipment - Data Circuit
terminating Equipment (DTE- DCE) interface for Short
Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service
(CBS)
[4]
GSM 07.10
Support GSM 07.10 multiplexing protocol
[5]
GSM_TCPIP_Application_Note
GSM TCPIP Application Note
[6]
GPRS_Startup_User_Guide
GPRS Startup User Guide
[7]
GSM_MUX_Application_Note
MUX Application Note
[8]
SMS_Application_Note
SMS Application Note
[9]
Quectel_M66_Hardware_Design
M66 Hardware Design
[2]
16.2. Terms and Abbreviations
Table 5: Terms and Abbreviations
Abbreviation
Description
AMR
Adaptive Multi-Rate
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
212 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
ME
Mobile Equipment
TA
Terminal Adapter
MS
Mobile Station
DCE
Data Communication Equipment
TE
Terminal Equipment
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
RTS/CTS
Request To Send/Clear To Send
GPRS
DCD
DTR
CSD
PSC
PDP
TCP
UDP
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
General Packet Radio Service
Dynamic Content Delivery
Data Terminal Ready
Circuit Switch Data
Primary Synchronization Code
Packet Data Protocol
Transmission Control Protocol
User Datagram Protocol
16.3. Factory Default Settings Restorable with AT&F
Table 6: Factory Default Settings Restorable with AT&F
AT Command
Parameters
Factory Defaults
<value>
1
ATQ
<n>
0
ATS0
<n>
0
ATS3
<n>
13
ATS4
<n>
10
ATE
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
213 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
ATS5
<n>
8
ATS6
<n>
2
ATS7
<n>
60
ATS8
<n>
2
ATS10
<n>
15
ATV
<value>
1
ATX
<value>
4
<value>
1
<value>
0
<value>
0
<n>
0
<n>,<index>,<info>
0,0,0
<n>
0
<chset>
“GSM”
<type>
129
<n>
0
<n>
0
<n>
1
<n>
0
<mode>
0
<disableath>
0
<iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N2>,<Ver1>,<T4>
61,61,128,6,0,3
<level>
55
<level>
When AT+QAUDCH=0, the default
value <level>=60;
When AT+QAUDCH=1, the default
value <level>=40;
When AT+QAUDCH=2, the default
AT&C
AT&D
AT+ILRR
AT+CREG
AT+CCUG
AT+CCWA
AT+CSCS
AT+CSTA
AT+CLIP
AT+CLIR
AT+CMEE
AT+COLP
AT+CR
AT+QDISH
AT+CRLP
AT+CRSL
AT+CLVL
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
214 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
value <level>=35;
AT+CUSD
<n>
0
AT+CSSN
<n>,<m>
0,0
AT+CSNS
<mode>
0
AT+CMOD
<mode>
0
AT+CMGF
<mode>
0
AT+CNMI
<mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>,<bfr>
2,1,0,0,0
<show>
0
<service>
0
<gainlevel>
When AT+QAUDCH=0, the default
value <gainlevel>=80;
When AT+QAUDCH=1, the default
value <gainlevel>=144;
<gainlevel(Normal_Mic)>,<gainlevel(He
adset_Mic)>,<gainlevel(Loudspeaker_
Mic)>
4,9,8
<n>
0
<n>
0
<n>
0
<mode>
1
AT+QEXTUNSOL
<mode>
0
AT+QRIMODE
<timemode>
0
AT+CSDH
AT+CSMS
AT+QSIDET
AT+QMIC
AT+QSCLK
AT+QCLIP
AT+QCOLP
AT+QIURC
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
16.4. AT Command Settings Storable with AT&W
Table 7: AT Command Settings Storable with AT&W
AT Command
Parameters
Display with AT&V
ATE
<value>
Yes
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
215 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
ATQ
<n>
Yes
ATS0
<n>
Yes
ATS3
<n>
Yes
ATS4
<n>
Yes
ATS5
<n>
Yes
ATS6
<n>
Yes
ATS7
<n>
Yes
<n>
Yes
<n>
Yes
<value>
Yes
<value>
No
<value>
Yes
<value>
Yes
<format>,<parity>
Yes
<dce_by_dte>,<dte_by_dce>
Yes
<value>
Yes
<rate>
Yes
<n>
Yes
<n>,<index>,<info>
Yes
<n>
Yes
<chset>
Yes
AT+CSTA
<type>
Yes
AT+CLIP
<n>
Yes
AT+CLIR
<n>
Yes
AT+CMEE
<n>
Yes
ATS8
ATS10
ATV
ATX
AT&C
AT&D
AT+ICF
AT+IFC
AT+ILRR
AT+IPR
AT+CREG
AT+CCUG
AT+CCWA
AT+CSCS
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
216 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
AT+COLP
<n>
Yes
AT+CR
<mode>
Yes
AT+QDISH
<disableath>
No
AT+CRLP
<iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N2>,<Ver1>,<T4>
Yes
AT+CRSL
<level>
No
AT+CLVL
<level>
No
AT+CUSD
<n>
Yes
<mode>
Yes
<mode>
Yes
<mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>,<bfr>
Yes
<show>
Yes
<gainlevel>
Yes
<gainlevel(Normal_Mic)>,<gainlevel(He
adset_Mic)>,<gainlevel(Loudspeaker_
Mic)>
Yes
<n>
No
<n>
Yes
<n>
Yes
<mode>
No
AT+QEXTUNSOL
<mode>
No
AT+QRIMODE
<timemode>
No
AT+CSNS
AT+CMGF
AT+CNMI
AT+CSDH
AT+QSIDET
AT+QMIC
AT+QSCLK
AT+QCLIP
AT+QCOLP
AT+QIURC
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
217 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
16.5. AT Command Settings Storable with ATZ
Table 8: AT Command Settings Storable with ATZ
AT Command
Parameters
Factory Defaults
ATE
<value>
1
ATQ
<n>
0
ATS0
<n>
0
ATS3
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
<n>
13
<n>
10
<n>
8
<n>
2
<n>
60
<n>
2
<n>
15
<value>
1
<value>
4
<value>
1
<value>
0
<value>
0
<n>
0
<n>,<index>,<info>
0,0,0
AT+CCWA
<n>
0
AT+CSCS
<chset>
“GSM”
AT+CSTA
<type>
129
AT+CLIP
<n>
0
ATS4
ATS5
ATS6
ATS7
ATS8
ATS10
ATV
ATX
AT&C
AT&D
AT+ILRR
AT+CREG
AT+CCUG
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
218 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
AT+CLIR
<n>
0
AT+CMEE
<n>
1
AT+COLP
<n>
0
AT+CR
<mode>
0
AT+QDISH
<disableath>
0
AT+CRLP
<iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N2>,<Ver1>,<T4>
61,61,128,6,0,3
AT+CRSL
<level>
55
<level>
When AT+QAUDCH=0, the default
value <level>=60;
When AT+QAUDCH=1, the default
value <level>=40;
When AT+QAUDCH=2, the default
value <level>=35;
<n>
0
<n>,<m>
0,0
<mode>
0
<mode>
0
<mode>
0
<mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>,<bfr>
2,1,0,0,0
<show>
0
<service>
0
<gainlevel>
When AT+QAUDCH=0, the default
value <gainlevel>=80;
When AT+QAUDCH=1, the default
value <gainlevel>=144;
AT+QMIC
<gainlevel(Normal_Mic)>,<gainlevel(He
adset_Mic)>,<gainlevel(Loudspeaker_
Mic)>
4,9,8
AT+QSCLK
<n>
0
AT+QCLIP
<n>
0
AT+CLVL
AT+CUSD
AT+CSSN
AT+CSNS
AT+CMOD
AT+CMGF
AT+CNMI
AT+CSDH
AT+CSMS
AT+QSIDET
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
219 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
AT+QCOLP
<n>
0
AT+QIURC
<mode>
1
AT+QEXTUNSOL
<mode>
0
AT+QRIMODE
<timemode>
0
16.6. Summary of URC
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Table 9: Summary of URC
Index
URC display
Meaning
Condition
1
+CMTI:<mem>,<index>
New message is received, and
saved to memory
AT+CNMI=2,1
2
+CMT:[<alpha>],<length><CR>
<LF><pdu>
New short message is received and
output directly to TE (PDU mode)
AT+CNMI=2,2
3
+CMT:<oa>,[<alpha>],<scts>[,
<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca
>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF>
<data>
New short message is received and
output directly to TE (Text mode)
AT+CNMI=2,2
4
+CBM:<length><CR>
New CBM is received and output
directly (PDU mode)
AT+CNMI=2,2
5
+CBM:<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<pag
e>,<pages>,<CR>,<LF><data>
New CBM is received and output
directly to TE (Text mode)
AT+CNMI=2,2
6
+CDS:<length><CR><LF><pd
u>
New CDS is received and output
directly (PDU mode)
AT+CNMI=2,2
7
+CDS:<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>
],<scts>,<dt>,<st>
New CDS is received and output
directly to TE (Text mode)
AT+CNMI=2,2
8
+CGEV:NW
DEACT<PDP_type>,<PDP_ad
dr>[,<cid>]
GPRS network detach
AT+CGEREP=1
9
+CGEV:ME
DEACT<PDP_type>,<PDP_ad
dr>[,<cid>]
GPRS ME detach
AT+CGEREP=1
10
+CGEV:NW DETACH
GPRS network detach
AT+CGEREP=1
11
+CGEV:ME DETACH
GPRS ME detach
AT+CGEREP=1
12
+CGREG:1
Network registered
AT+CGREG=1
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
220 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
13
+CGREG:0
Network unregistered
AT+CGREG=1
14
+CGREG:1,<lac><ci>
Network registered, with location
code
AT+CGREG=2
15
+CGREG:0,<lac><ci>
Network unregistered, with location
code
AT+CGREG=2
16
+QCGTIND
A CS voice call, CS data, fax call or
GPRS session termination indicator
AT+QCGTIND=1
17
+CSQN:<rssi>,<ber>
Signal quality change
AT+QEXTUNSOL
="SQ",1
Forbidden network is available only
AT+QEXTUNSOL
="FN",1
18
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
19
+CMWT:<store>,<index>,<voic
e>,<fax>,<email>,<other>
Message waiting
AT+QEXTUNSOL
="MW",1
20
+QGURC:<event>
Unsolicited result code follows
particular call state transition
AT+QEXTUNSOL
="UR",1
21
+CBCN<bcs>,<bcl>
Display battery connection status
and battery charge level
AT+QEXTUNSOL
="BC",1
22
+QBAND:<band>
Band mode display
AT+QEXTUNSOL
="BM",1
23
+TSMSINFO:<CMS error info>
Additional SMS information
AT+QEXTUNSOL
="SM",1
24
+CCINFO:<Call is
Disconnected>,<remain calls>
Displays the disconnected call ID
and the remain call numbers after
one of the call is disconnected
AT+QEXTUNSOL
="CC",1
25
RING
Indicates incoming call
N/A
26
Call Ready
Device is ready to make/receive
calls
N/A
27
UNDER_VOLTAGE POWER
DOWN
Under voltage shutdown indication
N/A
28
UNDER_VOLTAGE WARNING
Under voltage warning
N/A
29
OVER_VOLTAGE POWER
DOWN
Over voltage shutdown indication
N/A
30
OVER_VOLTAGE WARNING
Over voltage warning
N/A
31
NORMAL POWER DOWN
Normal power down
N/A
32
+COLP:<number>,<type>[,<su
baddr>,<satype>[CLI validity]],
The presentation of the
COL(connected line) at the TE for a
mobile originated call
AT+COLP=1
33
+CLIP:<number>,<type>"",,<al
phaID>,<CLI validity>
Mobile terminating call indication
AT+CLIP=1
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
221 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
34
+CRING:<type>
An incoming call is indicated to the
TE with unsolicited result code
instead of the normal RING
35
+CREG:<stat>
Indicate registration status of the ME
AT+CREG=1
36
+CREG:<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]
After cell neighborhood changing
shows whether the network has
currently indicated the registration of
the ME, with location area code
AT+CREG=2
37
+CCWA:<number>,<type>,<cla
ss>[,<alpha>]
Call waiting indication
AT+CCWA=1,1
38
RDY
ME initialization is successful
N/A
39
+CFUN:1
All function of the ME is available
N/A
40
+CPIN:<state>
SIM card pin state
N/A
41
MO RING
MO call ringing
AT+QMOSTAT=1
42
MO CONNECTED
MO call connected
AT+QMOSTAT=1
43
ALARM RING
Alarm event is triggered
AT+QALARM=1,<t
ime>,<repeat>,0/1
44
ALARM MODE
ME is switched on by alarm
AT+QALARM=1,<t
ime>,<repeat>,2
AT+CRC=1
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
16.7. Summary of CME ERROR Codes
Final result code +CME ERROR: <err> indicates an error related to mobile equipment or network. The
operation is similar to ERROR result code. None of the following commands in the same command line is
executed. Neither ERROR nor OK result code shall be returned.
<err> values are mostly used by common message commands. The following table lists most of general
and GRPS related ERROR Codes. For some GSM protocol failure cause described in GSM specifications,
the corresponding ERROR codes are not included.
Table 10: Different Coding Schemes of +CME ERROR: <err>
Code of <err>
Meaning
0
Phone failure
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
222 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
1
No connection to phone
2
Phone-adaptor link reserved
3
Operation not allowed
4
Operation not supported
5
PH-SIM PIN required
6
PH-FSIM PIN required
7
PH-FSIM PUK required
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
SIM not inserted
SIM PIN required
SIM PUK required
SIM failure
SIM busy
SIM wrong
Incorrect password
SIM PIN2 required
SIM PUK2 required
Memory full
Invalid index
Not found
Memory failure
Text string too long
25
Invalid characters in text string
26
Dial string too long
27
Invalid characters in dial string
30
No network service
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
223 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
31
Network timeout
32
Network not allowed - emergency calls only
40
Network personalization PIN required
41
Network personalization PUK required
42
Network subset personalization PIN required
43
Network subset personalization PUK required
44
Service provider personalization PIN required
45
46
47
103
106
107
111
112
113
132
133
134
148
149
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Service provider personalization PUK required
Corporate personalization PIN required
Corporate personalization PUK required
Illegal MS
Illegal ME
GPRS services not allowed
PLMN not allowed
Location area not allowed
Roaming not allowed in this location area
Service option not supported
Requested service option not subscribed
Service option temporarily out of order
Unspecified GPRS error
PDP authentication failure
150
Invalid mobile class
151
Link NS SP person PIN required
152
Link NS SP person PUK required
153
Link SIM C person PIN required
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
224 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
154
Link SIM C person PUK required
302
Command conflict
601
Unrecognized command
602
Return error
603
Syntax error
604
Unspecified
605
Data transfer already
606
607
608
609
610
3513
3515
3516
3517
3518
3738
3742
3765
3769
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Action already
Not AT command
Multi command too long
Abort COPS
No call disconnect
Unread records on SIM
PS busy
Couldn't read SMS parameters from SIM
SM not ready
Invalid parameter
CSCS mode not found
CPOL operation format wrong
Invalid input value
Unable to get control
3771
Call setup in progress
3772
SIM powered down
3773
Invalid CFUN state
3774
Invalid ARFCN
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
225 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
3775
The pin is not in GPIO mode
16.8. Summary of CMS ERROR Codes
Final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> indicates an error related to mobile equipment or network. The
operation is similar to ERROR result code. None of the following commands in the same command line is
executed. Neither ERROR nor OK result code shall be returned.
<err> values are mostly used by common message commands:
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Table 11: Different Coding Schemes of +CMS ERROR: <err>
Code of <err>
300
301
302
303
304
305
310
311
312
313
314
Meaning
ME failure
SMS ME reserved
Operation not allowed
Operation not supported
Invalid PDU mode
Invalid text mode
SIM not inserted
SIM pin necessary
PH SIM pin necessary
SIM failure
SIM busy
315
SIM wrong
316
SIM PUK required
317
SIM PIN2 required
318
SIM PUK2 required
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
226 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
320
Memory failure
321
Invalid memory index
322
Memory full
330
SMSC address unknown
331
No network
332
Network timeout
500
Unknown
512
513
514
515
517
528
529
530
531
3513
3515
3516
3517
3518
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
SIM not ready
Message length exceeds
Invalid request parameters
ME storage failure
Invalid service mode
More message to send state error
MO SMS is not allow
GPRS is suspended
ME storage full
Unread records on SIM
PS busy
Couldn't read SMS parameters from SIM
SM not ready
Invalid parameter
3742
Incorrect <oper> format
3765
Invalid input value
3769
Unable to get control of required module
3771
Call setup in progress
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
227 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
3772
SIM powered down
3773
Unable to operate in this CFUN state
3774
Invalid ARFCN in this band
3775
The pin is not in GPIO mode
16.9. Summary of Cause for Extended Error Report
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
16.9.1. Location ID for the Extended Error Report
Table 12: Location ID for the Extended Error Report
ID
0
1
2
3
Description
No error (default)
Cause for protocol stack (PS) layer
Internal cause for Mobility Management (MM) layer
Cause for PPP/IP-Stack
16.9.2. Cause for Protocol Stack (PS) Layer
Table 13: Cause for Protocol Stack (PS) Layer
Cause
CM Cause
0
Description
Radio link fail
1
Unassigned number
3
No route to destination
6
Channel unacceptable
8
Operator determined barring
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
228 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
10
Call barred
11
Reserved
16
Normal call clearing
17
User busy
18
No user responding
19
User alerting, no answer
21
Call rejected
22
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
34
38
41
42
43
44
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Number changed
Pre-emption
Non-selected user clearing
Destination out of order
Invalid number format (incomplete number)
Facility rejected
Response to STATUS ENQUIRY
Normal, unspecified
No circuit/channel available
Network out of order
Temporary failure
Switching equipment congestion
Access information discarded
Requested circuit/channel not available
47
Resource unavailable, unspecified
49
Quality of service unavailable
50
Requested facility not subscribed
55
Incoming calls barred within the CUG
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
229 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
57
Bearer capability not authorized
58
Bearer capability not presently available
63
Service or option not available, unspecified
65
Bearer service not implemented
68
ACM equal or greater than ACM maximum
69
Requested facility not implemented
70
Only restricted digital information bearer capability is available
79
81
87
88
91
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
111
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Service or option not implemented, unspecified
Invalid transaction identifier value
User not member of CUG
Incompatible destination
Invalid transit network selection
Semantically incorrect message
Invalid mandatory information
Message type non-existent or not implemented
Message type not compatible with protocol state
Information element non-existent or not implemented
Conditional information element error
Message not compatible with protocol
Recovery on timer expiry
Protocol error, unspecified
127
Interworking, unspecified
128
Telematic interworking not supported
129
Short message Type 0 not supported
130
Cannot replace short message
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
230 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
143
Unspecified TP-PID error
144
Data coding scheme (alphabet) not supported
145
Message class not supported
159
Unspecified TP-DCS error
160
Command cannot be acted
161
Command unsupported
175
Unspecified TP-Command error
176
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
208
209
210
211
212
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
TPDU not supported
SC busy
No SC subscription
SC system failure
Invalid SME address
Destination SME barred
SM Rejected-Duplicate SM
TP-VPF not supported
TP-VP not supported
SIM SMS storage full
No SMS storage capability in SIM
Error in MS
Memory Capacity Exceeded
SIM Application Toolkit Busy
213
SIM data download error
224
CP retry exceed
225
RP trim timeout
226
SMS connection broken
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
231 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
255
Unspecified error cause
304
Invalid PDU mode parameter
305
Invalid TEXT mode parameter
313
SIM failure
320
Memory failure
321
Invalid memory index
322
Memory full
330
340
500
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
SMSC address unknown
No +CNMA acknowledgement expected
Unknown error
SMS no error
Message length exceeds maximum length
Invalid request parameters
ME storage failure
Invalid bearer service
Invalid service mode
Invalid storage type
Invalid message format
Too many MO concatenated messages
SMSAL not ready
SMSAL no more service
523
Not support TP-Status-Report&TP-Command in storage
524
Reserved MTI
525
No free entity in RL layer
526
The port number is already registered
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
232 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
527
There is no free entity for port number
528
More Message to Send state error
529
MO SMS is not allow
530
GPRS is suspended
531
ME storage full
532
Doing SIM refresh
CC Cause
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
896
897
898
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Command not allowed
Illegal card ID
Call allocation fail
BC fill fail
Call RE EST
Illegal DTMF tone
Illegal BC
Modify actual mode
Data action fail
No response from network
Call accept not allowed
General cause
CSD call is aborted by user during call establishment or MT call
abort MO call/USSD
CSD call is disconnected due to lower layer failure
SS Cause
1024
Cause none
1025
Unknown subscriber
1033
Illegal subscriber
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
233 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
1034
Bearer service not provisioned
1035
Tele service not provisioned
1036
Illegal equipment
1037
Call barred
1040
Illegal SS operation
1041
SS error status
1042
SS not available
1043
1044
1045
1051
1053
1054
1058
1059
1060
1061
1062
1067
1078
1095
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
SS subscription violation
SS incompatibility
Facility not supported
Absent subscriber
Short term denial
Long term denial
System failure
Data missing
Unexpected data value
PW registration failure
Negative PW check
Number of PW attempts violation
Position method failure
Unknown alphabet
1096
USSD busy
1145
Rejected by user
1146
Rejected by network
1147
Deflection to served subscriber
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
234 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
1148
Special service code
1149
Invalid deflection to number
1150
Max number of MPTY participants exceeded
1151
Resources not available
1152
General problem, unrecognized component
1153
General problem, mistyped component
1154
General problem, badly structured component
1155
1156
1157
1158
1159
1160
1161
1162
1163
1164
1165
1166
1167
1168
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Invoke problem, duplicate invoked
Invoke problem, unrecognized operation
Invoke problem, mistyped parameter
Invoke problem, resource limitation
Invoke problem, initiating release
Invoke problem, unrecognized linked ID
Invoke problem, linked resource unexpected
Invoke problem, unexpected linked operation
Return result problem, RR unrecognized invoked
Return result problem, RR, return result unexpected
Return result problem, RR mistyped parameter
Return error problem, RE, unrecognized invoked
Return error problem, RE return error unexpected
Return error problem, RE unrecognized error
1169
Return error problem, RE unexpected error
1170
Return error problem, RE mistyped parameter
MM Cause
2048
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Cause none
Confidential / Released
235 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
2050
IMSI unknown in HLR
2051
Illegal MS
2052
IMSI unknown in VLR
2053
IMEI not accepted
2054
Illegal ME
2055
GPRS not allowed
2056
None GPRS not allowed
2057
2058
2059
2060
2061
2062
2063
2064
2065
2068
2069
2070
2080
2081
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
MS ID not derived by network
Implicit detach
PLMN not allowed
Location area not allowed
Roaming area not allowed
GPRS not allowed in PLMN
No suitable cells in LA
MSC temp not reachable
Network failure
MAC failure
Sync failure
Congestion
Serve option not supported
Request serve option not subscribed
2082
Serve option temp out of order
2086
Call cannot be identified
2088
No PDP context activated
2096
Retry upon entry into a new cell
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
236 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
2111
Retry upon entry into a new cell
2143
Semantically incorrect message
2144
Invalid MM info
2145
Message type non existent
2146
Message type incompatible with protocol state
2147
IE not implemented
2148
Conditional MM IE error
2149
2159
2160
2161
2162
2163
2164
2165
2166
2167
2168
2169
2170
2171
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
Message not compatible with protocol state
Protocol error unspecified
Access barred
Assignment reject
Random access failure
RR no service
PLMN search reject emergency
RR connection release
Authentication failure
IMSI detach
Abort by network
Connection timeout
Enqueue fail
Not updated
2172
State not allowed
2173
Emergency not allowed
2174
No service
2175
Access class barred
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
237 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
SIM Cause
2560
Command success
2561
Command fail
2562
Fatal error
2563
No inserted
2564
CHV not init
2565
CHV verify error
2566
2567
2568
2569
2570
2571
2572
SM Cause
3080
3097
3098
3099
3100
3101
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
CHV block
Access not allow
SAT command busy
DL error
Memory problem
Technical problem
PUK unlock
Operator determined barring
LLC SND failure
Insufficient resource
Unknown APN
Unknown PDP address or type
Authentication failure
3102
Activation reject GGSN
3103
Activation reject
3104
Unsupported service option
3105
Unsubscribed service option
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
238 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
3106
Out of order service option
3108
Regular deactivation
3109
QOS not accepted
3110
Network fail
3111
Reactivation required
3112
Unsupported network context activation
3113
Semantic error in TFT operation
3114
3115
3116
3117
3118
3153
3167
3168
3169
3170
3171
3172
3173
3183
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
3184
Syntactical error in TFT operation
Unknown PDP context
Semantic error in packet filter
Syntax error in packet filter
PDP context WO TFT already act
Invalid TI
Incorrect message
Invalid MAND info
Unimplemented message type
Incompatible message type protocol state
Unimplemented IE
Conditional IE error
Incompatible message protocol state
Unspecified
Startup failure
ABM Cause
3273
Success
3274
Invalid network account ID
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
239 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
3275
GPRS reactivate
3276
GPRS protocol rejection
3277
CSD reactivate
3278
CSD PPP negotiated failed
3279
CSD action failed
3280
CSD call setup failed
3283
Rejected
3284
3285
3286
TCM Cause
3372
3373
3374
3375
3376
3377
3378
3379
3380
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Slot limited
Abort
None auto deactivation
Invalid parameter
NSAPI not in use
ACL action not allowed
ACL SIM file full
ACL add entry failed
ACL del entry failed
ACL set entry failed
ACL SIM read failed
ACL SIM write failed
Confidential / Released
240 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
16.9.3. Internal Cause for MM Layer
Table 14: Internal Cause for MM Layer
Cause
Description
112
Forbidden PLMN
113
Access class barred
114
No coverage
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
GPRS service not allowed
Timer expiry
SIM inserted
SIM removed
SIM absent
SIM invalid for PS
SIM invalid for CS
SIM invalid for PS and CS
Low layer fail
Connection in progress
Not updated
Connection establish failure
Connection abort
Connection failure
129
Emergency not allowed
130
No GPRS coverage
131
Abnormal LU
132
Abnormal LU less than 4 times
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
Confidential / Released
241 / 242
GSM/GPRS Module Series
M66 AT Commands Manual
133
Same LAI IMSI attaching
16.9.4. Cause for PPP/IP-Stack
Table 15: Cause for PPP/IP-Stack
Cause
Description
0
No error
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
l
e
t
l
c
a
e
i
t
u
n
Q ide
f
n
o
C
M66_AT_Commands_Manual
LCP fail
Authentication fail
IPCP fail
ESC detect
Plug out detect
PPP GPRS dialup already activated
PPP not activated by external modem yet
PPP already activated by external modem
PPP not activated by WAP over CSD yet
PPP already activated by WAP over CSD
PPP wrong CSD mode ID
PPP detect AT command during dialup
PPP detect escape during dialup
Confidential / Released
242 / 242

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project